The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutPROJECT MANUAL - 10-00248 - BYUI Mark Austin Bldg - RemodelRoom 170 Welding Lab to Welding & Thermosciences Lab Remodel Mark Austin Technical & Engineering Building Brigham Young University -Idaho Project No. 3885 Project Manual Construction Documents June 25, 2010 Owner: Mechanical Engineer: BYU-Idaho Engineered Systems Associates, Inc. Office #213 PPLT 315 West Center, Suite 407 Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205 Pocatello, Idaho 83204 ph.208.496.2449 ph.208.233.0501 fx.208.496.6449 fx.208.233.0529 esa@engsystems.com Architect: michaelchad Electrical Engineer: design build architect Payne Engineering, Inc. 261 East Main 1823 East Center Street Rexburg, Idaho 83440 Pocatello, Idaho 83201 ph.208.313.3866 ph.208.232.4439 motortaco@hotmail.com fx.208.232.1435 payneengincering@gmail.com Structural Engineer: Design Intelligence, LLC 1037 Erikson Drive Rexburg, Idaho 83440 ph.208.359.1461 fx.208.359.0740 scott@designintel.com 10/6/99 Table of Contents It TABLE OF CONTENTS THE CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY -IDAHO STANDARD CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS I. INVITATION TO BID IL NOTICE TO BIDDERS III. FORM OF PROPOSAL IV. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS V. FORM OF CONTRACT A. SHORT FORM B. LONG FORM VI. GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS A. GENERAL CONDITIONS B. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS C. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS VII. MONTHLY PROGRESS ESTIMATE SCHEDULE OF VALUES 10/6/99 Table of Contents u Facility Planning & Construction Brigham Young University -Idaho • 283 Physical Plant • Rexburg, ID • 83460-8205 June 29, 2010 Contractor Re: Invitation to Bid — Austin Welding Lab Remodel Proiect No. - 3885 To Whom It May Concern: You are invited to bid on the above -referenced project. This project consists of reconfiguring welding booths and creating a Thermo Sciences lab. The project completion date is September 3, 2010. A mandatory pre-bid has been scheduled for July 6 2010 at 10:00 AM in Room 212 of the Physical Facilities Building. Bids will be opened and read aloud on July 20, 2010 at 10:00 AM, in Room 212 of the Physical Facilities Building at Brigham Young University -Idaho. A performance bond and a labor and materials payment bond for 100% of the contract will be required for this project. We hope that you will be able to bid this project. Sincerely, Rulon Nielsen Director, Facility Planning and Construction RRN/mt Rulon Nielsen Facilities Planning/Construction Director 450 S. Physical Plant Way Rexburg, ID 83460-8205 Phone: (208) 496-1138 Fax: (208) 496-2490 Email: nielsenm@byui.edu m NOTICE TO BIDDERS SECTION 1 --PROJECT: Austin Welding Lab Remodel Project Number: 3885 SECTION 2-- LOCATION: BYU-Idaho SECTION 3 --OWNER: BYU-Idaho SECTION 4 --DESIGNER: Michael Chad Alldredge, Architect SECTION 5 --STANDARD CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS: The bidder is directed to the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, Brigham Young University Standard Contract Requirements (revised 6 October 1999)This volume is an integral part of the contract documents and is hereby made a part of the contract. SECTION 6-- TIME OF COMPLETION: A. Date: September 3, 2010 SECTION 7--PREBID CONFERENCE A. Prebid Conference will be: Date: July 6, 2010 Time: 10:00 AM Place: Physical Facilities Building, Room 212 SECTION 8 --RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BIDS: A. Bids will be received: Date: July 20, 2010 Time: 10:00 AM Place: Physical Facilities Building, Room 212 By: Rulon Nielsen B. The Owner reserves the exclusive right to release all publicity relating to the proposals and the project. SECTION 9 --GENERAL CONTRACTORS: A. Bidding by General Contractors will be by invitation only. SECTION 10 --DRAWINGS: A. Drawings are available at the following plan room locations: BYU-Idaho Physical Facilities Building 2nrzooa Notice to Bidders BYU-Idaho FORM OF PROPOSAL ME OF PROJECT Austin Welding Lab Remodel DJECT NUMBER 3885 ME OF CONTRACTOR TE OF PROPOSAL : undersigned, hereinafter referred to as the Bidder, certifies that the following facts and/or circumstances have occurred or A relating to the proposed work for BYU-Idaho were prepared by Michael Chad Alldredge, Architect 1. That Bidder has received the contract documents for the above entitled project. 2. That Bidder has received The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter -Day Saints BYU-Idaho Standard Contract Requirements, revised October 6, 1999. 3. That Bidder is familiar with such documents, has examined the site of the proposed work, including availability of access, utilities, and other similar items relating to performance of the work and is thoroughly familiar with all general and local conditions which could in any way affect this work. 4. That no verbal agreements or representations with or by any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner exist or have been made to the Bidder and the Bidder in submitting this proposal is in no way relying thereon. 5. That if this proposal is accepted, Bidder will enter into a contract with the Owner in substantially the form contained in the contract documents, and will provide the bonds, insurance coverage and all other items required by the contract documents. 6. The term "base bid" shall be understood to include all work contained in the contract documents excluding any substitutes or alternates. The Owner will have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. der hereby proposes to furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, transportation, services, licenses and permits :ssary for the completion of all the work set forth in the contract documents for the sum of: Form of Proposal AS FURTHER CONDITIONS OF THIS PROPOSAL: 1. The Bidder agrees to complete the work on or before September 3, 2010. 2. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of addenda No. (s) 3. The Bidder's contractor's license number is 4. Is your bonding capacity adequate for this job? Yes_ No_ 5. For verification call Telephone Number 6. Is your license limit adequate for this job? Yes _ No_ PROPOSED SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS The total sum of the Bidder's proposal shall include the furnishing and installing of all materials, equipment, and labor as called for in the contract documents as a base bid. Hereafter give the total amount to be added or deducted for a complete installation of equipment or materials other than those specified and those approved by addendum are submitted for the Owner's consideration. All materials and equipment proposed for substitution shall be listed below and must meet the requirements of the contract documents. During the time of consideration of the proposals, complete information shall be submitted immediately to the Architect and Owner's Representative. The Contractor is referred to Page 3 of the Instructions to Bidders, Section 9, prior approvals and substitutions for requirements relative to proposed substitutions. Proposed Manufacturer and Substitute Catalog Numbers $ Add $ Deduct I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2/2004 2 Fom of Proposal 'YPE OF BIDDER'S ORGANIZATION: nticlal Name of Organization 'orporation, Co -partnership, Individual, or Other ddress ame of Individual Members of Firm: lame of President of Corporation: ime of Secretary of Corporation: Irporation is organized under the laws of the State of: Signature Title or Office Legal Address Form of Proposal BIDDER'S LIST OF SUBCONTRACT BIDS USED IN PROPOSAL (LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS) PROJECT NAME: Austin Welding Lab Remodel PROJECT NUMBER: 3885 OWNER'S NAME: BYU-Idaho SUBCONTRACT CLASSIFICATIONS I SUBCONTRACTOR USED I AMOUNT 2/2004 4 Form of Proposal INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION 1 -- BIDDING BY INVITATION A. Bidding shall be by written invitation only. Those wanting to be considered for such invitation shall apply to: Facility Planning and Construction Department BYU-Idaho Physical Facilities Building 450 S. Physical Plant Way Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205 B. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids. SECTION 2 -- CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Contract documents may be obtained by contractors from: Facility Planning and Construction Department BYU-Idaho Physical Facilities Building 450 S. Physical Plant Way Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205 B. Subcontractors and suppliers who want to obtain Contract documents (plans and specifications) may do so by requesting the documents and paying the printing costs. C. All Contract documents must be returned within ten (10) days after the bid opening, or the deposit will be forfeited. Those documents purchased outright by the Bidders are exempted. D. The Contract documents (plans and specifications) maybe deposited with local Bid Depositories. Bidders may contact the Construction Section for locations. The Contract documents may be examined free at: Facility Planning and Construction BYU-Idaho Physical Facilities Building 450 S. Physical Plant Way Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205 SECTION 3 -- CONTRACT METHOD A. All work specified is to be done under one general contract. Bids will be accepted by the Owner from prime contractors only. SECTION 4 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. If any Bidder doubts the true meaning of any of the Contract documents, or finds errors, discrepancies or omissions, he shall request a clarification from the Architect in writing. Any interpretations or corrections will be made only by written addenda duly issued by the Owner. All addenda will be mailed, faxed or otherwise delivered to each person receiving a set of the Contract documents. Requests for clarifications must be submitted to the Architect at least five (5) days before bid opening. Unwritten instructions or interpretations will have no validity. B. Should discrepancies appear in the Contract documents that are not resolved by an addendum, it is expressly understood that the Contractor has used the most expensive method and/or material in the bid. SECTION 5 -- REQUIREMENTS BEFORE SUBMITTING BIDS A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site and structures located there (if any). The Contractor shall thoroughly examine all Contract documents in relation to all conditions that might directly or indirectly affect the contract work. The bid amount shall reflect all such conditions. 2/2004 1 Instructions to Bidders SECTION 6 -- PREPARING AND SUBMITTING BIDS A. To receive consideration, a bid must be made according to the following instructions: 1. Bids shall be prepared on BYU bid forms. 2. Bids shall have all items or blanks filled. Numbers shall be stated both in writing and in figures. If there is a discrepancy between the two, the written number shall govern. 3. Bids shall be without interlineations, alterations or erasures. 4. Signatures shall be by those authorized to execute the Contract. 5. The Bidder's legal name, business address and telephone number shall be stated. 6. Neither oral bids nor modifications shall be considered. 7. Faxed bids will be accepted if the bidder (1) contacts the Construction Section before faxing the bid, (2) sends the bid with sufficient time to be received and delivered to the bid opening location before bid time, and (3) calls the Construction Section before bid time to confirm that the bid was received and delivered to the bid opening location. 8. It is the Bidder's sole responsibility to see that the bid is received at the proper time. Any bid received after the scheduled bid opening time will be returned unopened to the Bidder. 9. Bidders shall accept proposals from only those subcontractors who are approved by the Owner or those who have shown to the Bidder's satisfaction that they are financially capable of handling the work. Furthermore, subcontractors must have the technical ability, personnel, plant, experience and reputation to carry out their portions of the work. It will be assumed that the question of bonding subcontractors, where considered desirable or necessary by the Contractor, including the cost of such bonds, has been resolved before bids have been submitted. 10. In order for the bid to be considered valid, two or more Bidders bidding as a "joint venture" must have the written approval of the Owner before submitting a bid. All members ofajoint venture shall sign the bid and an official representative of the joint venture shall be designated in the proposal. 11. The term "base bid" shall be understood to include all work contained in the Contract, excluding any alternates or substitutes. The Owner shall have the right to accept alternates in any order or combination, and to determine the low Bidder based on the sum of the base bid and alternates accepted. 12. Substitutes or alternates accepted by the Owner may be included in the Contract or added by Change Order. In determining the low Bidder, the Owner will not consider substitutes. 13. Bids may be withdrawn by the Bidder, either in person or by a written request before bid opening. Once opened, the Bidders will have 24 hours to review and withdraw their bids. After the 24-hour period, the bids may not be withdrawn and must remain fixed as submitted for 45 days after opening. Envelopes must contain nothing but the proposal and bid breakdown forms if required. Envelopes shall be opaque, sealed and bear the Bidder's name. SECTION 7 -- APPROVAL OF CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS A. As soon after the bid opening as is practicable, the Owner will interview the apparent low Bidder and if deemed advisable, the second or third low Bidders. Within two hours of the bid opening, the low Bidder and the second or third low Bidders will provide to the Owner a list of subcontractors and their dollar amounts that were used in formulating their bid. The list of subcontractors will be examined by the Owner as soon as possible. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any subcontract proposal. B. If a Bidder doubts the correctness or acceptability of any subcontract proposal, the Bidder may submit the names and amount of other competing subcontractors for consideration, making sure that he clearly states which one he has used in formulating his proposal. 2/2004 2 Instructions to Bidders SECTION 8 -- FACTORS AFFECTING AWARD OR REJECTION OF BID j i A. The Bidder's and subcontractor's past performance, organization, equipment and ability to perform and complete their contract as specified will be vital elements, as well as the amount of their bids, in the award of the Contract. B. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, or to waive any irregularities or informalities in bids received. The { Owner reserves the right to accept the bid that will, in the Owner's opinion, best serve the interests of the Owner regardless of whether such bid is the lowest. SECTION 9 -- PRIOR APPROVALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Several acceptable brands of equipment, manufactured articles or methods of construction may have been identified in i the Contract. It is not intended to close the Contract against other brands, articles, or methods that may warrant consideration. However, unspecified materials must have prior approval by the Owner to be considered. B. Prior Approvals: Requests for approval of unspecified materials must be made to the Architect at least five days before bid opening. The requests for prior approval shall be considered by the Architect if time permits and if properly documented. The Architect is not bound to consider these items despite their apparent validity. C. Fully detailed technical data, references and other information shall be furnished simultaneously with the requests for prior approval items. D. Such requests shall be reviewed by the Architect and the Owner. If accepted, the approved requests will be included in an addendum. E. The Contractor's "base bid" shall include the furnishing of only those items that are explicitly specified or which have received prior approval by addendum. F. Substitutions: Besides the "base bid," any equipment or material supplier and any contractor or subcontractor may, at his option, submit a substitute price and product for any item specified which he feels warrants consideration by the Owner. This proposed substitution is to be listed where indicated on the bid form. G. Any proposed substitute submitted by a Bidder shall include the amount by which the "base bid" would be increased or decreased. H. The Owner may accept or reject any substitute proposed. In determining the low Bidder, the Owner will not consider substitutes. If requested, the Contractor shall furnish information or data concerning the substitute. The Owner may request the Contractor, at his own expense, to have the substitute tested by an approved testing laboratory. SECTION 10 -- FORM OF CONTRACT A. Copies ofthe form ofthe Contract that the successful Bidder will be required to execute are included in this specification. SECTION 11 --ADDENDA A. All addenda issued before bid opening shall be included in the bid and shall be a part of the Contract. 2/2004 3 Instructions to Bidders SECTION 12 -- REQUIREMENTS IMMEDIATELY AFTER SIGNING THE CONTRACT A. Immediately after signing the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish the following to the Owner: I. Executed performance, labor and material payment bonds, each in an amount equal to 100 percent of the contract sum as specified in the General Conditions. 2. Insurance certificates as specified in the General Conditions. 3. A cost breakdown of the work that may, as approved by the Owner, serve as a basis for making monthly payments to the Contractor. 4. A project schedule as to how he intends to construct the project. This must be, in the opinion of the Owner, a realistic method of analyzing and scheduling each component of the work. It must show when all trades or crafts start and finish their work. This schedule must be reviewed at least biweekly and updated as required. A critical path method of scheduling is preferred. If the Contractor cannot produce and maintain such a schedule, this service must be obtained from an outside consultant. The schedule must be approved by the Owner's Representative before the Contractor submits the first payment request. B. The Contractor shall issue subcontracts as mutually agreed between the Owner and the Contractor. A complete list of subcontractors and major suppliers including names, addresses and telephone numbers are required within fourteen (14) days of the Owner's subcontractor review. SECTION 13 -- DISQUALIFICATION A. If the above requirements are not satisfied, the bid may be disqualified at the discretion of the Owner. 22004 4 Instructions to Bidders To: BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY -IDAHO PHYSICAL FACILITIES DEPARTMENT REXBURG, ID 83460-8205 (Hereinafter called "ONA ") SHORT FORM CONTRACT Contract Date: Project No.: Work Order No: Brigham Young University -Idaho (hereinafter called "Owner") engages the re^ to perform and complete the following described work, on the terms and subject to the conditions hereafter set forth (including the Contract documents identified below): A. IDENTIFICATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Fumish all labor and materials to do work as contained in the plans and specifications entitled " " dated , and prepared by . The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints Brigham Young University -Idaho Standard Contract Requirements are a part of this contract. B. COMPENSATION: Total compensation for the above work shall be C. TIME OF COMPLETION: The work shall be completed on or before D. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IS: E. CONTRACTO"REPRESENTATIVEIS: Rulon Nielsen The Contractor agrees to perform the work covered by this Contract and to comply with and be bound by all of the terms and conditions contained in the Contract Documents. UNIVERSITY OPERATIONS DATF. CONTRACTOR DATE MANAGING DIRECTOR UNl V ERSITY RESOURCES DATE VICE PRESIDENT DISTRIBUTION: I. Contractor 2, Owner's Representative 3. Purchasing 2/2004 THE CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS CHURCH EDUCATIONAL SYSTEM CONTRACT ,�J CONTRACT U I BYU-IDAHO Project No: Work Order No: Account No: THIS CONTRACT, made and executed as of the ?????????, by and between BYU-IDAHO, a non-profit Utah corporation of Rexburg, Idaho (hereinafter referred to as "Owner"), and ?????? (hereinafter referred to as "Contractor"). WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments hereinafter specified to be paid by the Owner to the Contractor and the covenants and agreement herein contained to be kept and performed by the parties hereto, the Contractor agrees to the construction of the Sped Replacement Building at BYU-Idaho in Rexburg, Idaho (hereinafter referred to as the "Project"), and to furnish and deliver all materials, and perform and supervise all work as required herein and by the contract documents hereinafter identified, all of which shall collectively constitute the contract, and shall hereinafter be referred to collectively as the "Contract". ARTICLE I. THE IDENTIFICATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Plans entitled "??T" were prepared by ??? and approved by Rulon Nielsen, Facilities Planning and Construction Director at BYU-Idaho, on ???. B. The Specifications entitled "???" were prepared by ???, and approved by Rulon Nielsen, Facilities Planning and Construction Director at BYU-Idaho, on ???. C. Addendum Number One, dated ??? D. Addendum Number Two, dated ??? 212004 Long Forth Contract E. Addendum Number Three, dated ??? F. Addendum Number Four, dated ??? G. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints Standard Contract Documents are a part of this Contract (including the Supplementary Conditions). ARTICLE II. THE CONTRACT SUM The Owner agrees to pay to the Contractor, in accordance with the terms hereof, the following: (spell Base Bid $??? Alt. I If any Alt. 2 If any Total $??? The Contractor agrees to accept a total of (spell as full compensation for performing his obligation under the contract. ARTICLE III. DATE OF COMPLETION The Contractor agrees to complete the work required by the Contract on or before midnight???. Time is hereby expressly declared to be of the essence of the contract. ARTICLE IV. THE CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The Contractor's Representative is ??? ARTICLE V. THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE The Owner's Representative is Rulon Nielsen 2/2004 Long Form Contract IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner has caused this instrument to be signed by its President, attested by its Secretary, and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed, and the Contractor has hereunto affixed his signature as of the day and year above written. ATTEST: BYU-IDAHO A Utah Corporation President – BYU-Idaho University Resources Vice President– BYU-Idaho Contractor ACKNOWLEDGED: University Operations Managing Director—BYU-Idaho 2/2004 Long Form Contract GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 1 - DEFINITIONS SECTION 2 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SECTION 3 - DISCREPANCIES IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SECTION 4 - ADDITIONAL DRAWINGS & INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 5 - OWNERSHIP AND MAINTENANCE OF DRAWINGS SECTION 6 - PROGRESS MEETINGS SECTION 7 - PROJECT SCHEDULE SECTION 8 - EMERGENCIES SECTION 9 - SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES SECTION 10 - ROYALTIES & PATENTS SECTION 11 - CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE & BONDS SECTION 12 - HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT SECTION 13 - BUILDER'S RISK LOSSES SECTION 14 - PERMITS AND REGULATIONS SECTION 15 - MEASUREMENTS, SURVEYS, BUILDING LAYOUT, & SITE EXAMINATION SECTION 16 - INSPECTION OF WORK SECTION 17 - SUPERVISION & CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES SECTION 18 - ARCHITECT'S STATUS AND DECISIONS SECTION 19 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 20 - TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES SECTION 21 - TESTING SECTION 22 - CUTTING AND PATCHING SECTION 23 - CONDEMNATION OF WORK SECTION 24 - CHANGES IN WORK SECTION 25 - CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST SECTION 26 - DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME SECTION 27 - DISPUTES SECTION 28 - CORRECTION & WARRANTY OF WORK SECTION 29 - OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK SECTION 30 - CONTRACTOR'S PAY REQUEST SECTION 31 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR SECTION 32 - PAYMENTS WITHHELD SECTION 33 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY SECTION 34 - SUBCONTRACTORS SECTION 35 - LOCKOUT/TAGOUT, CONFINED SPACE AND HAZARD COMMUNICATION SECTION 36 - OWNER'S RIGHT TO CANCEL CONTRACT 3/2008 General Conditions/!C SECTION 37 - CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT SECTION 38- SEPARATE CONTRACTS SECTION 39 - ASSIGNMENT SECTION 40 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES SECTION 41 - ACCELERATION OF WORK SECTION 42 - CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 43 - TEMPORARY OR TRIAL USAGE OF ANY MECHANICAL DEVICES SECTION 44 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT SECTION 45 - OWNER -PURCHASED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 3/2008 General Condilions/PC GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION I - DEFINITIONS A. OWNER - Brigham Young University- Idaho, Rexburg, Idaho hereinafter referred to as the "Owner." B. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE - The Facilities Planning and Construction Director - Physical Facilities Department -Physical Facilities Building, Room 283, Brigham Young University -Idaho, Rexburg, Idaho 83460- 8205 C. ARCHITECT - The Architect is a licensed Architect, Engineer, or organization so designated in the Contract. The term "Architect" means the Architect or his authorized representative. D. CONTRACTOR - The Contractor is the person or organization identified as such in the Contract and referred to throughout the Contract as if singular in number and masculine in gender. The term "Contractor" means General Contractor or his authorized representative. E. SUBCONTRACTOR - The person, firm or corporation supplying direct or indirect labor and/or materials at the site of the Project and under separate contract or agreement with the Contractor. PROJECT COORDINATOR - The person who acts as liaison between the Owner and the Contractor for the Project. G. THE WORK - The work includes all labor necessary to produce the construction required by the Contract and all materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction. H. THE PROJECT - The Project is the total construction designed by the Architect. The work performed under the Contract may be the whole or a part. I. WRITTEN NOTICE - Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to an officer of the corporation for whom it was intended. Written notice is also served by a registered or certified mailing to the last known address of the corporation. SECTION 2 - THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The "Contract " consists of the Contract, the Instructions to Bidders, the Supplementary Conditions, the General Conditions, the Drawings, the Specifications, Addenda and Change Orders. A modification may be made only by Change Order after execution of the Contract. B. The Contract - The Contract represents the entire agreement between the parties and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations or agreements (either written or oral) including the bidding documents. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Change Order. C. The Contract and associated documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. The intention of the Contract is to include all labor, materials, equipment and other items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Project. D. Words that have well-known technical or trade meanings are used herein by such recognized meanings. E. Within the Contract there shall be the following precedence: 1. The Contract takes precedence over all other documents. 2. Supplementary General Conditions take precedence over General Conditions. 3. General Conditions take precedence over Drawings and Specifications. 4. Addenda or modifications of any nature, to the Drawings and Specifications, take precedence over the original. 5. Specifications take precedence over Drawings. 3.2008 1 General Conditions 6. Within the Working Drawings, the larger scale takes precedence over smaller, figured dimensions over scaled, and noted materials over graphic indications. SECTION 3 - DISCREPANCIES IN THE CONTRACT A. Should any question arise regarding the Contract, the Contractor shall request written interpretation and clarification from the Architect before proceeding. Without such request and authorization, the Contractor proceeds at his own risk. SECTION 4 - ADDITIONAL DRAWINGS & INSTRUCTIONS A. The Architect shall promptly furnish any additional instructions or clarification necessary for proper execution of the work specified in the Contract. SECTION 5 - OWNERSHIP AND MAINTENANCE OF DRAWINGS A. All drawings and specifications furnished to the Contractor are the property of the Owner. They are not to be used on other work and are to be returned to the Owner if so requested. One copy may be retained by the Contractor. B. The Owner shall furnish, free of charge to the Contractor, all copies of drawings and specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the work. The Contractor shall keep in good order on the Project one copy of drawings, addenda and specifications that shall be readily available to the Architect and the Project Coordinator. SECTION 6 - PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Weekly job site meetings will be held by the Project Coordinator. The agenda and meeting minutes will be prepared by the Architect. The Architect shall distribute meeting minutes within seven days of the meeting. 1. The Contractor shall attend such meetings and shall require subcontractors to attend as necessary. 2. These meetings are to: a. Insure that all activities are being coordinated properly on the Project. b. Review the schedule. C. Check the status of: (1) Submittals, including shop drawings and samples. (2) Change Orders and Job Instructions. (3) Payment requests. (4) Any other matters that may need to be reviewed. SECTION 7 - PROJECT SCHEDULE A. Within 7 days after the notice to proceed and not less than 14 days prior to the first pay request, the contractor shall submit a project schedule to include all sections of work associated with the project. The project schedule shall be submitted in a CPM format using a recognized scheduling software. The Contractor shall prepare the schedule to be printed out on a sheet or series of sheets of reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. B. The Contractor shall submit a printed form of the schedule as noted above and shall also submit the schedule on disk so the owner can review the schedule and use the schedule. The Contractor shall submit the schedule with early start early finish dates and late start late finish dates. Changes during the contract period that do not impact the schedule beyond the contract completion date will not be considered as an impact. C. The schedule shall be in sufficient detail to include, but not be limited to, all sections of the specifications and plans that are of significant elements to the project. All work shall be represented to show relationships leading to the critical path of the project. 3.2008 2 General Conditions D. After the acceptance of the schedule the contractor shall submit a baseline schedule. This baseline schedule will be used throughout the project to evaluate impact of change orders and delays. The baseline schedule shall be updated and reviewed at each project meeting as directed by the owner's representative. E. All activities on the schedule shall be related to the schedule of values of the project. This relationship shall be submitted with each pay request with an updated schedule to show actual work in place vs. scheduled, with percentages shown of both dollars and work in place for the total project and the current billing period. SECTION 8 - EMERGENCIES A. In case of an emergency endangering life or threatening the safety of the structure or of adjoining property, the Contractor may, without waiting for specific authorization from the Architect or Owner, act at his own discretion to safeguard life or property. Compensation and time shall be allowed the Contractor for such emergency work. The amount of both shall be decided between the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner. B. The Contractor shall notify the Project Coordinator immediately and shall make a full written report of such emergency action to the Project Coordinator within seven days after the event. SECTION 9 - SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES A. General: 1. Deliver submittals, shop drawings or samples to the Owner and Architect as indicated below. Accompany each submittal with a transmittal letter indicating the title of the Project, the name of the Contractor, the title of the submittal and the specification section number. Submittal Schedule: 1. The Contractor shall, within twenty-one (21) calendar days after receipt of the signed contract, furnish a submittal schedule listing all items that the Contract requires for review. This schedule shall include, among other things, shop drawings, manufacturers' literature, certificates of compliance, material samples, material colors, guarantees, etc. 2. The schedule shall show the type of item, the Contract requirement reference, the Contractor's scheduled dates for submitting the items and the projected need dates for review answers from Architect. The schedule shall show a minimum of twenty-one (21) calendar days for review by the Architect. If re- submittal is required, an additional fourteen (14) days will be allowed. The Contractor shall revise and update this schedule as appropriate and submit it with each payment estimate until all items have been submitted and reviewed. 3. Coordinate the submittal schedule with the Project schedule for all the work. The Contractor shall revise and update the submittal schedule to insure consistency with the Project schedule. The Contractor shall promptly provide such revised submittal schedules to the Owner. 4. Furnishing of the submittal schedule or subsequent revisions shall not be interpreted as relieving the Contractor of the obligation to comply with all Contract requirements for items on the schedule. C. Definitions: 1. Shop drawings are drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures, and other data prepared by the Contractor or subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor. Shop drawings illustrate some portion of the work and confirm dimensions and conformance to the Contract. 2. Samples are physical examples furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials, equipment, color, or construction and to help establish standards by which the work will be judged. D. Procedure 1. The Contractor shall review and stamp his approval and certification that the products and methods meet the requirements specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall submit four (4) copies to the Architect and one (1) copy to the Owner, with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence. Shop drawings and samples not required by the Contract but requested by the Contractor, or supplied by those under contract to him, need not be submitted to the Architect and Owner for approval. These shop drawings shall meet all specified shop drawing requirements, except those relating to submission to the Architect and Owner. 2. The Contractor shall reject shop drawings not in conformance with the Contract. 3.2008 3 General Conditions 3. Shop drawings shall be complete and detailed. If reviewed by the Architect, each copy of the shop drawings shall be stamped and dated by the Architect. If review "with exception" or "as noted" by the Architect is so identified, stamped and dated, the Contractor shall comply with notations shown. If the Architect requires resubmission of submittals, the Contractor shall make any corrections at the Contrac- tor's expense. The Contractor shall not copy Project drawings and use those drawings as submittals. a. Any shop drawing, which does not conform, to the Contract shall be explicitly noted on the drawings and in the transmittal letter. This shall not be construed as approval to proceed with performing or providing the changed work until specifically approved by the Owner and a Change Order accordingly issued. If shop drawings show variations from Contract requirements because of standard shop practice, or for any other reason, such variations shall be explicitly noted in the transmittal letter. Shop drawing review shall be general. It shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for accuracy of such shop drawings, nor for proper fitting, construction of work, furnishing of materials or work required by Contract and not shown on shop drawings. b. The number of copies of shop drawings and other submittals required will be established at the pre - construction conference if more than five are required. The Contractor shall bear cost of reproduc- ing copies of shop drawings required. Instead of prints, a sepia may be required. E. By approving shop drawings and samples, the Contractor determines and certifies that all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data conform to the Contract. The Contractor determines and certifies that he has checked and coordinated each shop drawing and sample with requirements of the Contract. F. No work requiring a shop drawing or sample submission shall be commenced until submission has been approved in writing by the Architect. G. Samples: 1. Where specified or required, the Contractor shall submit samples to the Architect with specification material, affidavits and other documentation as required by the Architect or the Owner. 2. It is the Contractor's specific responsibility to ascertain that samples have been checked and approved before being submitted. 3. Cost of samples, including transportation, delivery and any other costs, shall be borne by the Contractor. Unless specified otherwise, samples shall be submitted in triplicate for the Architect, the Owner and the Contractor. The Contractor shall keep his samples on the jobsite. Where samples are specifically required to be submitted for approval, no work involving the sampled materials shall proceed until written approval has been obtained from the Architect. H. Review by the Architect and the Owner: I. Review of shop drawings by the Architect and the Owner shall not be construed as a complete check, but will show only that the general method of construction and detailing is satisfactory. Review of such drawings will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any error that may exist in the submittals. SECTION 10 - ROYALTIES & PATENTS A. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend and hold the Owner harmless from all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights. SECTION 11 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE AND BONDS A. Insurance: 1. The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained the insurance required and evidence of such insurance has been submitted to and approved by the Owner. The submittal of said evidence to the Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of the Contractor. a. Workers' Compensation & Employers' Liability Insurance - (1) As required by statute. 12008 4 General Conditions b. Commercial General Liability Insurance -ISO Form CG 00 01 (10/93) or equivalent, Occurrence Policy, with - (1)' ` Limits of not less than - (a) General Aggregate $ 2,000,000.00 (b) Products Comp/OPS Aggregate $ 2,000,000.00 (c) Personal and Advertising Injury $ 1,000,000.00 (d) Each Occurrence $1,000,000.00 (e) Fire Damage (any one fire) $ 50,000.00 (I) Medical Expense (any one person) $ 5,000.00 (2) Endorsements attached thereto including the following or their equivalent - (a) ISO Form CG 25 03 (11/85), Amendment of Limits of Insurance (Designated Project or Premises), describing the subject Contract and specifying the limits as shown above. (b) ISO Form CG 20 10'(10/93), Additional Insured - Owners, Lessees, or Contractors (Form B), naming the Owner as an additional insured and containing the following statement - "This endorsement .also constitutes primary coverage in the event of any occurrence, clahm, or suit..." C. Automobile Liability Insurance, with (1) Limits of not less than $.1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit per accident. (2) Coverage applying to any auto. B. Certificate of Insurance, on ACORD 25-S(3/88) Form, or equivalent, filed with the Owner identifying: I. Owner, as defined in the. Construction Contract, as Certificate Holder and Additional Insured. 2. Endorsements, as listed above. (Note: If forms other than ISO forms are used, copies of the non -ISO forms are to be attached to this certificate). 3. Project as defined in the Construction Contract. 4. Cancellationclause of the certificate amended to read, "Should any of the above described policies be canceled beforethe expiration thereof, the issuing company will mail notice within thirty (30)days to the lcertificate holder named. 5. Insurance Companies Providing Coverage - All companies listed must be rated "A-" or better in the Standard and Poor's Solvency Review. Guide Property & Casualty (current edition.) 6. The Name, Address, and Telephone Number of The "Producer" - The: certificate is to bear air original signature of the Authorized. Representative of the Producer. Facsimile or mechanically reproduced signatures will not be accepted. C. Performance Bond and Labor & Material Payment Bond: I . The Contractor shall furnish the Owner a performance bond, and a labor and a material payment bond each in an amount equal to 100 percent of the Contract sum as security for all obligations arising under the Contract. Such bonds shall - a. Be written on Form AIA Document A312. Where the laws of the state in which the Project is located mandate a statutory payment bond form, such mandated payment bond form shall be used but is to be accompanied by the AIA Document A312 Performance Bond. b., Be issued by asurety company or companies licensed in the state in which the Project is located and holding validcertificates of authority under Sections 9304 to 9308, Title 3.1, of the United States code as acceptable sureties or reinsurance companies on federal bonds. Tire penal sum obligation assumed by each surety, shall not exceed the authorization shown in the current revision of Circular #570 as issued by the United States Treasury Department, i.e., "Treasury List." C. Be accompanied by a certified copy of the Power of Attorney stating the authority of the Attorney- in-fact executing the bonds on behalf of the Surety. D. The Owner reserves the right to reject any insurance company, policy, endorsement, certificate of insurance, surety company, performance bond, or labor and material payment bond with or without cause. E. Tire cost of such insurance and such bonds as required above shall be the obligation of the Contractor. 3 2008 5 General Conditions SECTION 12, - HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT A. Besides obtaining insurance coverage as required above, the Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner, the Architect, and their agents and employees'harmless from and against any liability, demands, causes of action or claims thereof, whether well founded or otherwise, including the cost of defending the same, for' bodily injury to any person whosoever (including the employees of the Owner or the Architect)' or damage to property of any person during construction because of the negligence of the Contractor, the subcontractors or materialmen, their agents or employees. B. The Contractor shall be liable to defend the Owner and Architect in any lawsuit filed by any subcontractor or supplier because of the building Project that is the subject matter of this Contract. Where liens have been filed against the Owner's property, this shall include and require the Contractor or his bonding company to obtain lien releases and record them in the appropriate'couttty or local jurisdiction so as to unencumber and provide the Owner with a title free and clear from any liens filed by subcontractors or material suppliers. C. No subcontract shall relieve the Contractor of any of his liability or obligation under the Contract.The Contractor agrees that he is fully responsible to the Owner for acts or omissions of his subcontractors and their materialmen and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them. SECTION 13 - BUILDERS RISK LOSSES A. The Owner will provide Builder's Risk Insurance or reimburse the Contractor for losses to the Project, described herein, to the extent to which such losses are or world be covered by the Owner's American Protection Insurance Company's "AII Risk" insurance policy covering Builders Risk Insurance. Deductible Clause - All claims for loss or expense arising out of one occurrence shall be adjusted as one claim, and from the amount of such adjusted claim, there shall be deducted the sum of: a. $1,000.00 on Projects less than $1,000,000.00. b. $5,000.00 on Projects more than $1,000,000.00. (The deductible amounts are the responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor.) Loss Reporting Procedure - All losses requiring reimbursement under this Section shall be reported to the Project Coordinator as soon as practical and always before the beginning of repairs so that details of the loss can be obtained and verified to simplify a prompt loss adjustment. Copies of the insurance forms referred to above are available fiom the Owner at the Brigham Young University Physical Facilities, Construction Section offices. SECTION 14 - PERMITS AND REGULATIONS A. Permits I . The Contractor shall obtain and the Owner shall pay cost of permits necessary for completion of this work. 2. The Contractor shall notify the Project Coordinator and the local jurisdiction of all inspections and secure certificates of occupancy that may be required by authorities havingjurisdiction over the work. The Contractor shall deliver these certificates to the Project Coordinator before execution of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. Regulations 1. The Contractor and others working under his jurisdiction shall do all work according to laws, regulations, and ordinances required by governmental authority or other agencies having jurisdiction over this work. 2. If the Contractor observes that the Contract is in variance with any laws, regulations or ordinances, he shall notify the Project Coordinator and shall not proceed unless necessary changes required for 3.2008 6 General Conditions compliance with said laws, regulations and ordinances have been made as provided in the General Conditions, Section 24. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for any work knowingly done contrary to laws, regulations, and ordinances. The Contractor shall fully indemnify the Owner against loss and bear all costs and penalties arising from those violations. SECTION 15 - MEASUREMENTS, SURVEYS, BUILDING LAYOUT & SITE EXAMINATION A. The Owner will be responsible for establishment of lot lines and benchmarks. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for 1. Laying out the work hereunder on the building site. 2. The proper observance of property lines and set back requirements. 3. The location and layout of buildings as noted in the drawings with respect to the position on the property and elevation in relation to the grade. C. If existing conditions shown in the Contract differ materially from those the Contractor encounters in the performance of the work, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect and the Owner in writing. D. The Architect and the Owner shall promptly investigate the reported differing conditions. If they find that such conditions do materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost or the time required for performance of any part of the work, the Owner shall make an equitable adjustment by Change Order. E. As the work progresses, the Contractor shall lay out on the forms, or floors, the exact locations of all partitions as a guide to all trades. Subcontractors providing work that is to be placed in connection with walls and/or partitions shall check such locations and immediately notify the Contractor of any conflicts in structure or changes necessary to adapt services, utility lines or equipment required by the Contract. Subcontractors and others failing to make such checks and give notice as outlined above shall be required to assume any costs resulting from their failure to do so. Before ordering materials or doing work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements to properly size or fit the work. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed by the Owner resulting from the Contractor's failure to comply with this requirement. SECTION 16 - INSPECTION OF WORK A. The Architect and the Project Coordinator shall always have full access to all phases of the work. The Contractor shall provide adequate means to simplify inspection by the Architect and Project Coordinator. 1. The Contractor shall notify the Project Coordinator and local authorities twenty-four (24) hours before doing work that covers or otherwise makes it difficult to inspect structural, plumbing, mechanical or electrical work. 2. Should any of the work be covered without proper notification having been given to the Project Coordinator and local authorities, the Contractor shall uncover that work for inspection at his own expense. 3. The Contractor shall schedule the work so an inspection team may observe and inspect a maximum part of the mechanical, electrical, and plumbing work in operating condition, before it is covered up. This inspection team will fumish a list of items that must be completed to the satisfaction of the Project Coordinator before the work is concealed. SECTION 17 - SUPERVISION & CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the work under the Contract. The Contractor shall not change superintendents without the written consent of the Owner. SECTION 18 - ARCHITECT'S STATUS AND DECISIONS 3.2008 7 General Conditions A. The Architect shall assist the Project Coordinator during the construction period. 1. The Architect will make frequent visits to the site to familiarize himself with the progress and quality of the work and to determine if the work is proceeding according to the Contract and schedule. During periodic visits the Architect may condemn work that fails to conform to the Contract. 2. The Architect shall interpret the conditions of the Contract and be the judge of its performance. He shall use his powers under the Contract to enforce its faithful performance by the Contractor. The Architect will review shop drawings and prepare Job Instructions. The Architect will conduct inspections with the Project Coordinator to determine the dates of substantial completion and final completion. 3. The Architect's administrative authority shall be exercised through the Project Coordinator, except as otherwise provided in the Contract. 4. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs concerning the work. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for failure of the Contractor, subcontractor, material supplier or their employees to carry out the work according to the Contract. B. The Architect's decisions in matters relating to artistic effect will be final if consistent with the intent of the Contract. SECTION 19 - MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT A. DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING I. Materials shall be delivered to the site in original packaging with labels and trademarks intact, and such labels and trademarks shall remain intact until used. All materials, including structural steel and piping, shall be manufactured in the United States of America. 2. The Contractor shall confine his apparatus, storage of materials, and operations of his workers to limits indicated by law, ordinances and permits. The Contractor shall arrange and maintain parking of vehicles and storage of materials within contract limit lines and in an orderly manner leaving all walks, driveways, roads and entrances unencumbered. 3. All equipment on the site shall be protected from physical damage and from the elements by measures satisfactory to the Architect and the Project Coordinator. All rotating equipment shall be rotated four turns weekly during construction. 4. If any material is found not conforming to the Contract, the Contractor shall remove such nonconforming materials at his expense. B. PRODUCT OPTIONS & SUBSTITUTIONS 1. When several materials are specified in the Contract by name for one use, the Contractor may select any one of those so specified. The mixing of different products specified by name for one use is prohibited. 2. Items and material not specified in the Contract and installed in the work shall be removed and replaced by specified items and material at no additional cost to the Owner. No additional time will be added to the Contract for removal or replacement. 3. Wherever words "approved by," "satisfactory to," "submitted to," "inspected by," or similar phrases are used in this specification, they shall be understood to mean that the material or item referred to shall be approved by, be satisfactory to, submitted to, or inspected by the Architect and the Project Coordinator. SECTION 20 - TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES A. TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY 1. The Contractor shall arrange with the proper authority (State, County, City, Owner, etc.) for all power required by the Contractor during the construction period until the Certificate of Substantial Completion is issued. The Contractor shall bear all costs for these utilities until final acceptance by the Owner. This shall include costs for installation of all equipment, meters, lines, etc., for the use and maintenance of all utilities. The method of metering, connections, etc., must have the written approval of the body famishing the utility to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for all utilities needed for his use during the entire construction period. 2. The Contractor shall provide all temporary wiring, outlets, metering, and associated materials. The temporary electrical system shall comply with local codes and Article 305, "Temporary Wiring," of the National Electrical Code. 3.2008 8 General Conditions 3. The Contractor shall provide electrical power to distribution centers only. 4. If utility service is available from the Owner's permanent utilities, the Contractor may, by arranging with the Owner and paying for all costs, use these permanent utilities. The Owner assumes no responsibility for damage caused by the Contractor using any of the Owner's utilities due to interruption of services by the Owner, whatever the cause. 5. If electrical utility service is available from the Owner, the cost to the Contractor will be $.060 per kilowatt-hour. B. TEMPORARY LIGHTING 1. The Contractor shall provide wiring, outlets and fixtures for temporary lighting. 2. The Contractor shall provide pigtails and other lights for all areas within and around the building, sufficient to provide the following intensities: a. All working areas 3 foot candles b. Stairs, landings, ramps 5 foot candles c. Outdoor floodlighting within contract limit lines 3 foot-candles d. All areas involving finish work 30 foot candles C. TEMPORARY HEATING, COOLING & VENTILATING 1. All temporary heating and cooling shall be arranged and paid for by the Contractor. Heating and cooling from the central plant will be charged at $5.00 per million BTUs if available from the Owner. a. Contractor shall install a meter on steam lines to the project. b. Natural gas lines will have a meter installed. Contractor will be charged at current rates. 2. New Additions and New Buildings: a. The Contractor shall be responsible for installation and operation of temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating units including fuel, temporary piping, fittings, wiring, and connections in new additions and new buildings as necessary. b. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to building and contents caused by cold, heat, and dampness. C. The Contractor shall maintain safe conditions for use of temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating systems including, but not limited to, the following: (1) Operate equipment following the manufacturer's instructions. (2) Provide fresh air ventilation required by the equipment manufacturer. (3) Keep temperature of fuel containers stabilized. (4) Secure fuel containers from overturning. (5) Operate equipment away from combustible materials. (6) Provide adequate fire extinguishers. 3. Existing Building: a. Unless otherwise specified, existing facilities may be used, at the Owner's expense, to maintain minimum heating and cooling requirements. Normal setback temperature patterns shall not be interfered with except as specifically required to meet construction requirements. The existing system shall be protected by the Contractor from contamination, construction dust and debris. Filters shall be maintained in a clean condition and replaced with new filters at the completion of construction. 4. Specific heating requirements, unless otherwise specified, include but are not limited to: a. Gypsum Plaster - Uniform minimum temperature of 55 deg F for a week before application of plaster, during plastering operations, and until plaster is dry. b. Gypsum Board - 55 deg F minimum day and night during entire joint treatment operation and until execution of Certificate of Substantial Completion. C. Ceramic Tile - 50 deg F minimum during preparation of mortar bed, laying of the tile, and for 72 hours after completion of the tile work. d. Acoustical Tile - 70 deg F minimum during setting of the tile. e. Resilient Flooring - 70 deg F minimum during application. f. Painting - 55 deg F minimum during painting operations and until dry. 5. When temporary heating, cooling, or ventilating is no longer required, the Contractor shall dismantle the temporary system and remove it at his own expense. The Contractor shall return permanent mechanical equipment to 'like -new' condition for the Substantial Completion Inspection. All warranties will begin at substantial completion regardless of when the equipment was started. 3.2008 9 General Conditions Itib Y 1 UT Ili] ;7:1 '11 Y �I 117: [arid The Contractor shall install ajob telephone at his own expense. Local calls shall be paid for by the Contractor. Long-distance and toll calls shall be paid for by the party making the call. The Project Coordinator and the Architect shall have free and unrestricted use of this telephone concerning this job. Incoming calls shall be promptly answered during working hours. E. TEMPORARY WATER 1. The Owner will allow the Contractor usage of existing water facilities required for construction. If additional water is needed which cannot be supplied by existing facilities, the Contractor is to pay for installation of all valves, piping and metering, and arrange with the proper authority for connection of the additional water. TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES 1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain sanitary, temporary toilets. 2. The Contractor shall at all times maintain such facilities clean, neat and sanitary. 3. These temporary toilets shall be connected to the sewer wherever possible. 4. Temporary outside toilets shall be removed at completion of the job. G. SCAFFOLDING AND PLATFORMS 1. The Contractor or his subcontractors shall furnish and maintain all equipment such as temporary stairs, ladders, ramps, platforms, scaffolds, hoists, runways, derricks, chutes, elevators, etc., as required for proper execution of the work. 2. All apparatus, equipment, and construction shall meet all requirements of labor laws, safety regulations and other applicable State or local laws. 3. Permanent stairs shall be built whenever needed. The Contractor shall provide temporary treads, handrails, and shaft protection as needed or as required by governing codes. H. TREE & PLANT PROTECTION 1. Before commencing site work, the Owner shall build and maintain protective fencing around existing trees and vegetation as identified on the Project drawings. a. Individual trees shall have protective fencing built beyond drip line and to the satisfaction of the Project Coordinator. b. Groups of trees and other vegetation shall have protective fencing built around the entire group to the satisfaction of the Project Coordinator. C. Areas within protective fencing shall remain undisturbed and shall not be used for any purpose. 2. The Contractor shall protect all other trees, shrubs and lawns and all landscape work from damage. Provide guards and covering. If normal sprinkling system is disrupted, the Owner shall hand water all trees and other vegetation affected. 3. Vegetation designated on drawings to be protected that has died or has been damaged beyond repair shall be removed and replaced by the Owner and back charged to the Contractor. TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES 1. When walls and roof are in place, the Contractor shall provide temporary, weather tight enclosures for all exterior openings to protect all work from the weather. Openings into existing structure shall be made weatherproof. J. PROTECTION FROM SNOW & ICE I. The Contractor shall remove all snow and ice as may be required for the proper safety, protection and execution of the work. K. BRACING, SHORING, & SHEATHING 1. The Contractor shall design, furnish, install, and maintain all shoring, bracing, and sheathing as required for safety and for proper execution of the work and have same removed if required when the work is completed. 3.2008 10 General Conditions L. PROTECTION OF PERSONS 1. The Contractor shall provide, install, and maintain all necessary precautions to protect all persons on the site, including members of the public, from injury or harm. Such measures shall include: a. Posting of appropriate warning signs in hazardous areas. b. Providing guardrails, fencing and barricades of adequate heights around all openings in floors or roofs, and around all excavations. All guardrails shall meet all applicable codes. C. Providing warning lights around obstructions, pits, trenches, or similar areas on-site or in adjacent streets, roads, sidewalks, or in the structure itself. d. When use or storage of hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. M. PROTECTION FROM WEATHER 1. The Contractor shall always provide protection against weather (rain, wind, storm, frost, or heat) and keep all work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free from damage. At the end of the day's work, all work that might be damaged shall be covered. 2. During cold weather, the Contractor shall protect all work from damage. If low temperatures make it impossible to continue operations safely in spite of cold weather precautions, the Contractor shall cease work and so notify the Project Coordinator. N. PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORK 1. The Contractor shall protect all streets, private roads, and sidewalks, including overhead protection where required, and shall make all necessary repairs to damaged work at his own expense. 2. The Contractor shall provide proper protection of all existing work, furnishings, and fixtures likely to be damaged. When exterior openings are made in existing work, they shall be covered with weather tight protection at the end of the day's work. 3. Before commencing work, the Contractor shall survey the site and note any damage to existing structures including walks, curbs and utilities. Notify the Project Coordinator before proceeding with work. Any damage not noted by the Contractor and Project Coordinator will be repaired by the Contractor. 4. Any work damaged by failure to provide protection shall be removed and replaced with new work at Contractor's expense. O. FIRE PROTECTION 1. The Contractor shall provide at least one approved fire extinguisher in plain sight on each floor at each usable stairway prior to introduction of any combustible materials into the building. 2. Fires shall not be built on the premises except by express consent of Owner. P. PROTECTION OF ADJACENT PROPERTY I. The Contractor shall provide all necessary protection and support of adjacent property. Q. CONSTRUCTION CLEANING 1. The Contractor shall keep premises broom clean during progress of the work. 2. Remove waste materials and rubbish caused by employees, subcontractors, and installing material men. Roads inside and outside the Project shall be cleaned daily when hauling. 3. Before and during the painting and varnishing, clear area where such work is in progress of all debris, rubbish, and building materials that may cause dust. Sweep floors as required and take all possible steps to keep area dust free. R. SURFACE WATER CONTROL 1. The Contractor shall protect the excavation, trenches and building from water damage by: a. Providing pumps, equipment and enclosures necessary for such protection. It. Constructing and maintaining temporary drainage and pumping as necessary to keep the site free of water. 2. The cost of water control shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner may, if promptly notified of adverse underground water conditions, negotiate reasonable financial relief for the Contractor where such 12008 11 General Conditions conditions could not have been learned from the Soils Engineer's Report, the Contract, or by commonly known local conditions. S. OFFICES 1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain a weather tight office at the construction site. This building is to be located outside of, and well detached from the building under construction. This building shall be the property of the Contractor and shall be removed upon completion of the Project. T. SHEDS AND TRAILERS 1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain neat, weather -tight storage sheds or trailers for storage of all materials that might be damaged or affected by weather or moisture. These sheds or trailers shall have wood floors raised above the ground and will be outside of and well detached from the building under construction. They shall be property of the Contractor and shall be removed upon completion of the work. SECTION 21 - TESTING t A Testing companies will be selected by the Owner. B. The Owner and/or the Architect reserve the right to have tests made when deemed necessary. 1 C. Tests not specified as part of a trade section shall be paid for by the Owner. D. Should tests reveal a failure of the work to meet Contract requirements, subsequent tests related to the failure shall be paid by the Contractor. E. Tests shall be made according to recognized standards by a competent, independent testing laboratory. F. Materials found defective or not in conformance with the Contract shall be promptly replaced or repaired at the expense of the Contractor. G. Samples required for testing shall be furnished by the Contractor and selected as directed by the Architect or Project Coordinator. SECTION 22 - CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor shall coordinate all cutting, fitting or patching of work that may be required to make the several parts of the work come together properly. The Contractor shall fit it to receive or to be received by other portions of his own work or that of subcontractors as shown or reasonably implied by the Contract for a completed structure. The Contractor shall make proper repair or closure as the Architect or the Project Coordinator may direct. B. Do not endanger any work by cutting or digging. Do not cut or alter work of any section of the specifications without prior consent of the Architect and the Project Coordinator. The Contractor shall give 48-hour "Blue Stake" notice to Project Coordinator and local "Blue Stakes" location center. The Owner shall perform all utility locates inside Campus boundaries. C. Before arrival of Owner's or Contractor's floor covering installers, the Contractor shall prepare and clean Floors in preparation for floor covering. All holes, cracks and other surface irregularities shall be repaired by the Contractor. SECTION 23 - CONDEMNATION OF WORK A. The Owner or the Architect shall have the right to condemn and require removal of the following at the Contractor's expense: 1. Any portions of the work that do not meet the requirements of the Contract either in substance or installation. 3.2008 12 General Conditions 2. Any portions of the work damaged or rendered unsuitable through installation or resulting from failure to properly protect the work. SECTION 24 - CHANGES IN THE WORK A. The Owner may make changes within the general scope of the Contract, including but not limited to changes: I . In the Contract. 2. In the method or manner of performance of the work. 3. In the Owner-fumished facilities, equipment, materials, or site. 4. In directing acceleration of the work. B. Any written order from the Owner or Architect, which changes the scope of the work, shall be a Change Order. C. Field Changes - 1. The Architect is authorized to order minor changes during the work that will not involve extra cost or time. The Architect, with the concurrence of the Project Coordinator, is authorized to order on -the -spot minor changes to avoid delaying the work. The price of such minor changes will be mutually agreed upon between the Project Coordinator and the Contractor and recorded on a Job Instruction form. The Contractor will proceed with the changed work immediately. These minor field changes will subsequently be included in a Change Order. D. Job Instructions - Job Instructions may be issued which ask the Contractor to provide a price for changes in the scope of the work. The Contractor is to promptly provide costs associated with the changes, including credits for deleting work. Cost breakdowns are to be submitted in sufficient detail to verify that the complete scope of the work is understood by the Contractor, Architect and Project Coordinator. Change Orders - I. Except for emergencies as covered in Section 8, and to avoid delays, no changes in the work shall be made without a written Change Order. The Contractor's proposal shall be the basis of negotiation for the Change Order price and/or time adjustments. 2. If the Owner decides it is necessary to proceed with changed work to avoid delay before prices or times have been negotiated, he may order the Contractor to proceed on a time and materials basis or on a mutually agreed not -to -exceed price and time extension. This notice to proceed shall be by Job Instruction by the Owner's Representative. Upon receipt of such order, the Contractor shall immediately perform the changed work. The Owner and the Contractor will then negotiate the price and/or time when practicable, and a Change Order will be issued. G. When submitting proposals for Change Orders, the Contractor shall furnish a price breakdown itemizing costs as required by the Owner. Unless otherwise directed, the breakdown shall be in sufficient detail to allow an analysis of all material, labor, equipment, overhead costs and profit, and shall cover all work involved in the change, whether such work was deleted or added. Any amount claimed for subcontractors shall be supported by a similar price breakdown. In addition, if the proposal includes a time extension, ajustification shall be furnished. The proposal, with the price breakdown and time extension justification, shall be furnished within fourteen (14) days of the date that the first request was made by the Owner's Representative. 1. In such proposals, profit and overhead shall be computed as follows: a. The Subcontractor's profit and overhead shall not exceed 15% of total direct costs. b. The Contractor's profit and overhead on work done by his own crews shall not exceed 15% of total direct costs. C. The Contractor's profit and overhead on work performed by subcontractors shall not exceed 5% of total direct costs. d. The subcontractor's profit and overhead on work performed by any of his subcontractors shall not exceed 5% of total direct costs. Contractor's profit and overhead will not exceed 5% of those costs. e. On credit changes, profit and overhead on the originally estimated work will not have to be returned to the Owner. f. No supervision costs, office managerial costs or office expenses can be added to Change Orders. 3.2008 13 General Conditions H. Upon signing a Change Order, the Contractor releases the Owner from any further claim for money or time because of the changed work. SECTION 25 - CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST A. If the Contractor intends to assert any additional claim for equitable adjustment of cost or time, he must, within fourteen (14) calendar days of such events or circumstances, submit to the Architect and the Owner a written statement of the nature and monetary extent of such claim. If a mutually acceptable settlement of the claim cannot be reached within a reasonable time, the parties to the Contract shall handle the matter as a dispute under Section 27 "DISPUTES." SECTION 26 - DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME A. All time limits stated in the Contract are of the essence. B. If the Contractor is delayed any time during the progress of the work because of labor disputes, abnormal weather, unusual delays in transportation, or any other causes beyond the Contractor's control, the Contractor may be given additional time to complete the work by Change Order. 1. All requests for time extensions shall be made in writing to the Project Coordinator. a. Claims for time extension due to abnormal weather shall be made within fourteen (14) days of the abnormal weather. b. Claims made beyond these time limits shall be void. 2. Requests for time extensions shall be fully documented by including copies of daily logs, letters, shipping orders, delivery tickets and other supporting information. 3. In case of a continuing cause of delay only one claim is necessary. SECTION 27 - DISPUTES A. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, any dispute concerning a question of fact arising under this Contract that is not disposed of by agreement shall be decided by the Owner's Representative (as represented by the University Operations Managing Director/Brigham Young University -Idaho). The decision shall be rendered in writing and mailed or otherwise given to the Contractor, if the decision is not agreeable to the Contractor, the Contractor will, within fourteen (14) days of the decision, mail or otherwise furnish to the Owner's Representative a written appeal addressed to the Architect. The decision of the Architect shall be final and conclusive as far as the Owner is concerned. SECTION 28 - CORRECTION & WARRANTY OF WORK A. The Contractor shall promptly correct any work that fails to conform to the requirements of the Contract during the progress of the work. The Contractor shall remedy any defects due to faulty materials, equipment or construction that appears within one year from substantial completion of the Contract or within such longer periods as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract. The Contractor shall promptly correct all faulty work or pay all costs of correcting the faulty work. SECTION 29 - OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK A. If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the work according to the Contract or fails to perform any provision of the Contract, the Owner may, after providing seven days written notice to the Contractor and without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies. In such case, an appropriate Change Order will be issued deducting from the payments then or after that due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including the cost of the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. If the payments then or after that due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The Architect must concur with both such action and the amount charged to the Contractor. SECTION 30 - CONTRACTOR'S PAY REQUEST 3.2008 14 General Conditions A. The Contractor shall submit to the Project Coordinator a monthly payment request based on the estimated value of the work completed and materials on the site as of that date. The payment request shall be on a form provided by the Project Coordinator. Such estimates shall be based on the schedule of values submitted by the Contractor. The Contractor warrants that title to all work, materials and equipment covered by the payment request, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner upon the receipt of such payment by the Contractor, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances. The Project Coordinator may audit Contractor payments to subcontractors or suppliers anytime during the Project. SECTION 31 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR A. Upon approval of the Contractor's monthly payment request, the Owner will, within fourteen (14) days after receipt of said certification, mail to the Contractor a sum equal to 95% of the amount requested, less previous payment thereon. B. Upon receipt of a payment by the Owner, the Contractor shall pay each subcontractor within fourteen (14) calendar days, the amount allowed to the Contractor for the subcontractor's work. C. The Contractor's monthly estimate, which shall show the amount paid under the subcontract, shall be made available to the Project Coordinator for examination. Full and final payment of the Contract sum shall be made within thirty (30) days of the completion of the following requirements: 1. The Architect's and Owner's written acceptance of the work. 2. Payment of all labor and material bills, and receipt of all final lien waivers or lien releases from all subcontractors, mechanics and suppliers. 3. No payment made under this Contract, either wholly or in part, shall be construed to be an acceptance of defective or improper materials or construction. E. A schedule of dollar values shall be submitted to the Architect and the Owner not less than fourteen (14) days before first payment request, and shall be a condition precedent to processing the first payment. F. The schedule of values shall be submitted on the Owner's standard payment request form. 1. This breakdown shall follow the trade divisions of the specification. Each item there under shall include its pro rata part of overhead and profit so that the sum of the items will equal the Contract price. 2. The breakdown will correspond exactly to items of work in the Project schedule including work of sub contractors. SECTION 32 - PAYMENTS WITHHELD A. Payments may be withheld from the Contractor by the Owner to protect the Owner from loss due to: 1. Defective work not remedied. 2. Liens or claims filed or reasonable evidence of probable filing. 3. The Contractor's failure to promptly pay subcontractors for labor and materials accepted by the Contractor. 4. The Architect's or the Project Coordinator's reasonable doubt that the Project can be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract price. 5. Damage to another contractor. 6. Failure to maintain scheduled progress. B. Upon satisfactory correction of the above conditions, withheld payments will be made. SECTION 33 - CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor is fully responsible for the Project and all materials and work until the Owner has accepted the completed Project in writing. The Contractor shall replace or repair, at his own expense, any materials or work damaged or stolen even if the Contractor has received payment for the work or materials. B. By executing the Contract, the Contractor represents that he has visited the site, familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the work is to be performed, and correlated his observations with the 3.2008 15 General Conditions requirements of the Contract. C. The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent satisfactory to the Architect and the Owner. The superintendent shall be present at the Project site during the progress of the work. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the prior consent of the Project Coordinator, unless the superintendent ceases to be in the Contractor's employment. The replacement superintendent shall also be subject to these conditions. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and all communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by the Contractor to the Owner and the Architect. E. The Contractor shall forward all communications to the Project Coordinator. F. Unless otherwise directed, the Contractor shall, within two (2) hours after the bid opening, furnish the Architect and the Owner a list of the proposed subcontractors who will be working on the Project. The Owner will notify the Contractor in writing if any of the listed subcontractors are unacceptable. G. The Contractor shall not contract with any subcontractor who has been rejected by the Owner or the Architect. The Contractor will not be required to contract with any subcontractor, person or organization against whom he has a reasonable objection if such objection is made before the bid opening. The Contractor is not to use or accept any bid from a subcontractor unless the Contractor is willing and able to work with that subcontractor. H. If the Owner or the Architect requires a change of any proposed subcontractor or person or organization previously accepted by them, the Contract sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. The Contractor shall not make any substitution of a subcontractor who has been accepted by the Owner and the Architect unless the substitution is accepted in writing by the Owner and the Architect. J. All damage or loss to any property caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, any subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable, shall be remedied by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. K. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating and supervising all safety programs including, but not limited to: 1. All persons on the site, including the public. 2. All conditions specified in this contract. 3. All conditions required by codes and/or governmental regulations including OSHA. SECTION 34 - SUBCONTRACTORS A. The Contractor's responsibility for this Project includes the work of all subcontractors and material men, including those recommended or approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall be held responsible to the Owner for proper completion and guarantee of all construction and materials under subcontracts and for the acts and omissions of his subcontractors or their employees. Any warranties required for such work shall be obtained by the Contractor in favor of the Owner and delivered to the Owner. It is expressly understood and agreed that there is no contractual relationship between the Owner and any subcontractor, and under no circumstances shall the Owner be responsible for the nonperformance or financial failure of any subcontractor B. The Contractor shall require each subcontractor to agree: I. To be bound by terms of the Contract as far as applicable to his work. 2. To assume toward the Contractor the same obligations the Contractor has assumed toward the Owner, including the prompt payment of his employees and material men affected by this work. 3. To submit his applications for payment to the Contractor in time to allow the Contractor to make timely application to the Owner. 3.2008 16 General Conditions 4. To execute claim or lien releases or lien waivers as requested by the Contractor for payments made by the Contractor. 5. To make all claims for extra work done or for extensions of time to the Contractor in the same manner the Contractor is to make this type of claim to the Owner. C. The Contractor agrees in his relationship with the subcontractors: 1. To bind himself to the subcontractors by all the obligations that the Owner assumes to the Contractor. 2. To pay the subcontractors within fourteen (14) calendar days upon receipt of payment from the Owner that portion of the funds received as represents the subcontractor's portion of the work completed to the Contractor's satisfaction for which payment was made by the Owner. SECTION 35 - LOCKOUT/TAGOUT, CONFINED SPACE AND HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAMS A. The Contractor and the subcontractors will have a written "LockouUTagout" program. A copy of this program will be submitted to the Project Coordinator. B. The Contractor and the subcontractors will inform their employees of the Owner's LockouUTagout Program. Copies of this program are available from the Project Coordinator. C. The Contractor and subcontractors shall evaluate all work places to determine if any spaces are permit -required -confined spaces. (See 29 CFR 1910.146, Appendix A, Decision Flow Chart.) If the workplace contains permit spaces, the Contractor shall inform exposed employees by posting danger signs. (NOTE: A sign reading DANGER --PERMIT REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE, DO NOT ENTER, or similar language would satisfy this requirement.) If the Contractor decides that its employees will enter permit spaces, the Contractor shall carry out a written confined space program. The written program shall be made available to exposed employees and submitted to the Project Coordinator. The confined space program shall inform the employee that the workplace contains confined spaces that require a permit to enter those spaces. The Contractor shall identify the hazards that may be encountered in the confined space. The Contractor shall specify any precautions or procedures required for the protection of employees in or near confined spaces. D. Besides complying with the confined space requirements that apply to all employers, the Contractor shall: 1. Obtain any available information regarding permit space hazards and entry operations. 2. Coordinate entry operations when both contractor and subcontractor personnel will be working in or near permit spaces. E. Copies of the Owner's Confined Space Program are available from the Project Coordinator. F. The Contractor shall inform the Project Coordinator of the methods they will use to inform all employees on the site of any precautionary measures that need to be taken for protection during the workplace's normal and emergency operating conditions. The Contractor will specify the methods to inform the employees of the labeling system for hazardous materials. The Contractor may rely on an existing hazard communication program to comply with these requirements if it is current with OSHA regulations. G. The employer shall make the written hazard communication program available to employees and the Project Coordinator. H. Copies of the Owner's Hazard Communication Program are available from the Project Coordinator. SECTION 36 - OWNER'S RIGHT TO CANCEL CONTRACT A. The Contractor shall give the Owner at least twenty-one (21) calendar days' written notice before filing any petition for bankruptcy. The Contractor shall be in material breach of the Contract if the Contractor fails to give this notice. B. Should the Contractor make a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if he should persistently 3.2008 17 General Conditions refuse or fail to apply enough properly -skilled workers or proper materials to correctly execute the work, or if he should fail to make prompt payment to the subcontractors or material men for accepted material or labor, or constantly disregard laws, ordinances or instructions of the Architect and the Owner, or otherwise be guilty of substantial violation of any provision of the Contract, then the Owner may, without any prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the Contractor seven (7) day's written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and take possession of the premises and all materials, tools and appliances thereon, and finish the work by whatever method the Owner deems expedient. In such case, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract price exceeds the expense of finishing the work, including compensation for additional administrative services, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such expense shall exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. SECTION 37 - CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT A. If the work should be stopped under an order of any court, or other public authority for thirty (30) days, or the Owner shall fail to pay the Contractor within thirty (30) days of receipt of a properly prepared and completed payment request, then the Contractor may, on seven (7) days written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate this Contract and recover from the Owner the percentage of the Contract price represented by the work completed as of the date of termination with any loss sustained which can be established. SECTION 38 - SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. The Owner reserves the right to award separate contracts concerning other portions of the Project under these or similar conditions of the Contract to other contractors. The Contractor shall afford separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall properly connect and coordinate his work with theirs. C. If any part of the Contractor's work depends upon the work of another separate contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Project Coordinator any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render it unsuitable for proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor to inspect the work is an acceptance of the work of the separate contractor unless defects develop in the other separate contractor's work after the execution of the Contractor's work. SECTION 39 - ASSIGNMENT A. The Contractor shall not assign or sublet this Contract or any part of it or any monies due him without prior written consent of the Owner. SECTION 40 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. For each calendar day the work, or any portion that remains incomplete after the expiration of the time limit set in the Contract or by Change Order, the amount per calendar day shown in the Supplementary Conditions will be deducted from the money due or to become due to the Contractor, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages and added expense including administrative and inspection cost. B. At the time of substantial completion, and after the meeting to certify substantial completion, the Owner, Architect and Contractor shall agree upon the time that will be allowed for the Contractor to complete the remaining work on the Project. If the Contractor does not complete the work within the agreed time, the liquidated damages will continue at a reduced amount as stated in the Supplementary Conditions. The liquidated damages shall be in full force and effect, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages for each additional calendar day it takes to complete the Project. If liquidated damages are required, they shall be accrued and deducted from the money due the Contractor. 3.2008 18 General Conditions SECTION 41 - ACCELERATION OF WORK A. If, in the judgment of the Architect or the Owner, it becomes necessary at any time to accelerate the work or part of it, the Contractor shall deploy the workers in such portions of the Project to enable others to properly engage and carry on their work. If circumstances require that the entire work or a portion of it be completed at a date earlier than the Contract completion date as adjusted by Change Orders, the Contractor shall increase his forces, equipment, hours of work, or number of shifts, and shall speed delivery of materials to meet the altered completion date or dates ordered or directed. Any increase in cost to the Contractor according to such orders or directives will be adjusted by Change Order. If the work is behind schedule and the rate of placement of work is inadequate to regain scheduled progress, the Contractor shall immediately take action to ensure timely completion of the work. I. This shall be accomplished by any one or a combination of the following or other suitable measures: a. An increase in working forces. b. An increase in equipment or tools. C. An increase in hours of work or number of shifts. d. Expediting delivery of materials. 2. The Contractor shall notify the Project Coordinator of specific measures taken or planned to increase the rate of progress with an estimate of when scheduled progress will be regained. 3. Acceleration of work will continue until scheduled progress is regained. Scheduled progress shall be established from the latest revised and approved Project schedule for the job. 4. Timely completion will be understood as the Contract completion date as revised by all time extensions. 5. The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation for efforts to regain scheduled progress. SECTION 42 - CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL A. MATERIAL QUALITY 1. Materials incorporated into the Project shall be new except as otherwise indicated in the specifications. Materials shall be of specified quality and furnished in sufficient quantity to simplify proper and timely execution of the work. 2. The Contractor shall furnish evidence of the quality of materials incorporated into the Project as required by the Contract or at request of the Architect or the Project Coordinator. 3. Materials not meeting requirements of the Contract shall be removed from the Project and replaced with materials meeting the Contract requirements by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. B. ASBESTOS 1. The Contract has been prepared following generally accepted professional architectural and engineering practices. Accordingly, no asbestos or products containing asbestos have been knowingly specified for this Project. Notify the Project Coordinator immediately for instructions if. a. Materials containing asbestos are brought to the site for inclusion in the work. b. Asbestos materials are encountered in any existing structures upon which work is being done. 2. At the Architect's direction and with the Owner's approval, an independent testing laboratory will perform testing procedures on suspect materials at Owner's expense. 3. The Contractor shall certify, based upon his best knowledge, information, inspection and belief, that no building materials containing asbestos was used in the construction of the Project. Submit certification on form provided by the Owner. SECTION 43 - TEMPORARY OR TRIAL USAGE OF ANY MECHANICAL DEVICES A. Temporary or trial usage by the Owner of mechanical devices, machinery, apparatus, equipment or other work or materials supplied under this Contract before written acceptance by the Owner shall not be construed as evidence of the Owner's acceptance. 3.2008 19 General Conditions SECTION 44 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. FINAL CLEANING 1. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus materials and all rubbish from under and about the building. The Contractor shall leave the building clean and habitable, having thoroughly swept or vacuumed floors, cleaned windows and dusted flat surfaces such as cabinet tops and windowsills. 2. Besides general cleaning noted above, the Contractor shall do the following special cleaning for all trades at the completion of the work: a. Remove putty or caulking stains from glass. Wash and polish inside and outside, exercising care not to scratch glass. b. Remove marks, stains, fingerprints, other soil and dirt from painted, decorated and stained work. C. Clean and polish woodwork. d. Clean and polish hardware for all trades. This shall include removal of stains, dust, dirt, paint and other similar materials. e. Remove spots, soil and paint. Wash tile work. f Clean fixtures and equipment, and remove stains, paint, dirt and dust. g. Remove temporary floor protection and clean floors. Spray buff resilient flooring. h. Clean exterior and interior metal surfaces, including doors and windows, required to have polished finishes. Remove oils, stains, dust, and dirt. Polish surfaces, leaving them without fingerprints or other blemishes. 3. If the Contractor fails to clean up, the Owner may do so and the cost will be withheld from the Contractor's final payment. B. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1. The Contractor shall deliver to the Architect before the substantial completion inspection: a. Accurate "Record" drawings. b. Certificates of occupancy that may be required by authorities having jurisdiction over the work. C. OPERATING & MAINTENANCE DATA Before execution of the certificate of substantial completion, the Contractor shall furnish the operating instructions and maintenance manuals as called for in the Contract. D. WARRANTIES & GUARANTEES I. When written guarantees beyond one year after substantial completion are required of any section of the work, the Contractor shall secure such guarantees properly addressed and signed and in favor of the Owner. These documents shall be delivered to the Project Coordinator upon substantial completion of the Contractor's work and before execution of the certificate of substantial completion. 2. Delivery of guarantees and warranties shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation assumed under any other provisions of his contract. 3. Nothing within the Contract intends or implies that guarantees shall apply to work abused or neglected by the Owner. E. PRE -SUBSTANTIAL, SUBSTANTIAL, & FINAL COMPLETION INSPECTIONS 1. Pre -Substantial Completion Inspection: a. Upon the Contractor's request and if the request is accompanied by a punch list prepared by the Contractor, the Project Coordinator and the Architect will make inspections and furnish a list of additional items to be corrected or completed by the Contractor. b. The Contractor shall notify the Project Coordinator when items have been corrected or completed. Upon the Project Coordinator's verification of correction, the Project Coordinator will arrange a substantial completion inspection to include the Owner, Architect, engineers and college representatives. 2. Substantial Completion Inspection: a. At the substantial completion inspection, unless the work is rejected, the Owner, Architect, and Contractor will execute a certificate of substantial completion that states the dates for: (1) User occupancy, (2) Commencement of warranties, 3.2008 20 General Conditions (3) Final completion inspection, (4) Modifications to the amount assessed for liquidated damages. b. After inspection, the Architect will furnish a final list of items to be corrected. C. The Owner, Architect and Contractor will decide how much time is to be allowed for completion of the items. 3. Final Completion Inspection: a. Final Completion Inspection will ensure that all deficiencies noted at the substantial completion inspection have been corrected. b. When all items have been corrected, the Project Coordinator will process the final payment. C. If all items have not been corrected as agreed, the Owner may elect to complete the work under provisions of Section 29 of the General Conditions. d. All lien waivers and releases are to be submitted before final payment can be made. SECTION 45 - OWNER -PURCHASED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. The Owner desires to purchase certain materials, which will be utilized in the work. Contractor's duties with respect to Owner -purchased materials are: I. Scheduling. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a schedule of dates on which the Contractor requires delivery of Owner -purchased materials. The Owner will arrange for the materials to be delivered to the construction site on or before the specified dates. If delivery dates are changed, rescheduled, or otherwise varied from the original schedule, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of delivery date rescheduling and the Contractor shall coordinate the delivery of the Owner -purchased materials directly with the supplier or material man. 2. Pre -Installation Inspection. The Contractor shall be responsible for receiving, inspecting and storing all Owner -purchased materials until they are needed for installation by the Contractor. Regardless of any inspection performed by the Owner of the Owner -purchased materials, the Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the Owner -purchased materials to determine suitability, quality and conformance with specifications before installation or at such other time as the Contractor may desire in order to avoid interruptions and delays in the progress of the Project. The Contractor shall reject any material which does not meet specifications or which appears to have any defect, which may make the material unsuitable for use in the Project. The Contractor shall notify the Owner and the manufacturer or supplier of all defects and assist the Owner in arranging for the repair, replacement or correction of the defective condition. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of any deadline or completion date, which results from failure to discover defects, which the Contractor should have discovered through an inspection. 3. Defective Materials. The Contractor acknowledges that use of improper or defective material may result in costs and damages to the Owner in excess of the value of the materials; that after use in the Project it may be difficult or impossible to inspect the material to determine the cause of any failure; and that in the event of the failure of material there may be a question as to the cause of the failure. Because the Contractor's employees will be the last to handle and inspect material prior to incorporation into the Project, the Contractor will be liable to the Owner for damages resulting from failure of Owner -purchased materials during the Contractor's warranty period specified herein from any cause whatsoever unless the Contractor provides clear and convincing proof that (1) the entire loss from a failure is covered by a valid manufacturer's or supplier's warranty, or (2) the Contractor could not have prevented the failure by complying with the requirements of this Section concerning Owner -purchased materials. 4. Claims. The Contractor agrees to assist the Owner to present claims to manufacturers and suppliers for defects in Owner -purchased materials. Where there is any question as to the division of liability between the Contractor and a manufacturer or vendor, the Contractor shall provide all relevant information in the Contractor's possession, which may aid the Owner in determining the division of responsibility. The Owner shall have final approval of any proposed adjustment or settlement of warranty claims. 5. Implied Warranties. The benefit of contractual and implied warranties with respect to Owner -purchased materials shall run to the Owner and not to the Contractor. 6. Unloading. Except as otherwise provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for unloading all Owner -purchased materials and verifying delivery amounts to the Owner. 7. Custody and Security. The Contractor shall use reasonable care in protecting Owner -purchased materials from loss, deterioration, damage, theft, vandalism or destruction. 3.2008 21 General Conditions 8. Reports. At Owner's request, the Contractor shall furnish reports to the Project Coordinator demonstrating the Contractor's compliance with this Section. 9. Retained Ownership. All materials purchased by the Owner which remain after completion of the Project shall be the property of the Owner. If the Owner does not wish to retain or dispose of surplus Owner - purchased materials, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of them. i 10. Rights of Ownership. None of the foregoing duties of the Contractor with respect to Owner -purchased materials shall prevent the Owner from exercising any prerogative of ownership of the materials. 3.2008 22 General Conditions SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1.1 - COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION & COMPLETION OF THE WORK A. The Contractor shall be required to commence work 27 July 2010 or promptly after receipt of the contract from the Owner. B. The Contractor shall prosecute the work diligently so as to complete it within the time limit allowed in this document. C. The Contractor agrees to complete this work required by the Contract on or before midnight 3 September 2010. D. Time is hereby expressly declared to be of the essence of the Contract. 1.2 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. The amount agreed upon and established as liquidated damages up to substantial completion is $600.00 per calendar day. B. At the time of substantial completion the Owner and the Contractor will agree on how much time will be allowed for the Contractor to complete the remaining work. If the Contractor exceeds the time allowed, liquidated damages will continue at one third (1/3) of the amount of the original liquidated damages of $200.00 per calendar day. 10/6/99 ] Supplementary Conditions SPECIAL INSPECTIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS i ARTICLE 1 TESTING FIRM'S SRVICES 1.1 ESSENTIAL SERVICES REQUIRED: 1.1.1 Services will consist of field and laboratory quality control testing services on BYU-Idaho Projects as circumstances, special qualifications, or Building Codes (Chapter 17) may require. 1.1.2 The types of services required may be anticipated to be soils tests pertaining to compaction, concrete, quality control, special masonry inspection, visual welding inspection, structural steel and bolting inspection, spray on fireproofing, and asphalt paving quality control and all other tests that may become necessary and as listed in your proposal. 1.1.3 The ability to respond to calls for testing, with 24 hours notice, is required. 1.2 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES: 1.2.1 The TESTING FIRM agrees to endeavor to strictly conform to and be bound by budgetary considerations and memoranda of policy furnished to it by the OWNER and further agrees to perform work in strict compliance with all applicable laws, codes and industry standards. 1.2.2 The TESTING FIRM agrees to provide qualified and/or certified technicians for the performance of the work under this agreement. 1.2.3 The TESTING FIRM will produce written test results and distribute them per OWNER instructions. Test results shall be available within 24 hours of the test performed. 1.2.4 The TESTING FIRM will provide general liability insurance in the amount of $1,000,000. 1.2.5 All testing requested by the Contractor for his use and convenience is not part of the Agreement. 1.2.6 The TESTING FIRM will furnish to the OWNER documentation for all failed tests and their associated costs. 4/2009 Special Inspections General Conditions ARTICLE 2 THE OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The OWNER shall provide full information regarding the testing requirements for each project. Testing Services will be described for each separate project, including the name and location of the project, the testing services' budget, and the testing services' schedule, and the name of the OWNER's representative, in an Authorization to Proceed, issued by the OWNER. 2.2 The OWNER shall designate a representative authorized to act in his behalf with respect to the project. Coordinate your testing services through the contact person listed on the Authorization To Proceed. 2.3 The OWNER shall furnish required information required as expeditiously as necessary for the orderly progress of the work and the TESTING FIRM shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness thereof. ARTICLE 3 PAYMENTS TO THE TESTING FIRM 3.1 Payments under this agreement shall be made bi-monthly upon presentation of the TESTING FIRM's statement of services rendered. 3.2.1 The TESTING FIRM's statement of services shall follow the outline of the Proposal dated ???, including any amendments to the proposal. Submit one (1) original. Include an itemized statement including names of employees, hours worked and hourly rates, and/or the amount of each test. ARTICLE 4 TESTING FIRM'S ACCOUNTING RECORDS 4.1 Records of the TESTING FIRM's time, consultants, and reimbursable expenses pertaining to the project shall be kept on a generally recognized accounting basis and shall be available to the OWNER upon request. 4/2009 Special Inspections General Conditions ARTICLE 5 TERMINATION OF AGREEMENT 5.1 This Agreement may be terminated by either party upon ten (10) days' written notice should the other party fail substantially to perform in accordance with its terms through no fault of the other. In the event of termination due to fault of others than the TESTING FIRM, the TESTING FIRM shall be paid for its time, cost of materials, plus allowable expenses for services performed to termination date. ARTICLE 6 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 6.1 The OWNER and the TESTING FIRM, respectively, bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party to this Agreement and to the partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party with respect to all covenants of this Agreement. Neither the OWNER nor the TESTING FIRM shall assign, sublet or transfer any interest in this Agreement. 42009 Special Inspections General Conditions w z 0 W 0 0 z O a a z z 0 0 0 00 J J O l/) n a a K w w a a w w w F 0 0 0 0 0 0 DI e» O w ¢ O EdIRM FW - O w cc w U z 7 O N v O C J E j m K n a o a¢ d K W C Z Mo d 3 0 m I SOV SCHEDULE OF VALUES Job: Date' SP p Spec Description % Comp. Change Order Scheduled Value Revised Contract Previous Months This Month Total Earned Balance to. Complete Totals Page 1 of 1 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design TABLE of CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP DIVISION 00: NOT USED SPECIFICATIONS GROUP GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP DIVISION 01: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY 011100 SUMMARYOFWORK 011200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY 011400 WORKRESTRICTIONS 01 2000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 013000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013500 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014100 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 014200 REFERENCES 01 4301 QUALITY ASSURANCE 014500 QUALITYCONTROL 01 4546 DUCT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5400 CONSTRUCTION AIDS 01 5500 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING 015600 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES 015700 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016100 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6200 PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 6500 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS 017000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7300 EXECUTION 017400 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP DIVISIONS 02: NOT USED DIVISION 03: CONCRETE Table of Contents - 1 - Document 00 0110 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 030000 CONCRETE 030130 REHABILITATION OF CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 031000 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 031511 ANCHORS AND INSERTS 036000 GROUTING 036213 NON-METALLICNON-SHRrNK GROUT DIVISION 04: MASONRY 040000 MASONRY 040121 UNIT MASONRY REPOINTING 040131 UNIT MASONRY CLEANING 040513 CEMENT AND LIME MASONRY MORTARING 040516 MASONRYGROUTING 042000 UNIT MASONRY 042223 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 05: METALS 050000 METALS 050503 SHOP -APPLIED METAL COATINGS 050523 METAL FASTENINGS 051000 STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 05 1223 STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS DIVISION 06: WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 060000 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 060573 FIRE -RETARDANT WOOD TREATMENT 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061636 WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY 062024 DOOR, FRAME, AND FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION Austin Welding Lab Design DIVISION 07: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 079000 JOINT PROTECTION 079213 ELASTOMERICJOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08: OPENINGS Table of Contents - 2 - Document 00 0110 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 081000 DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1213 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 081429 PRE -FINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS/CLEAR 087000 HARDWARE 087100 FINISH HARDWARE 087101 COMMON FINISH HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS 087102 HANGING DEVICES 087103 SECURING DEVICES 087105 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS 087106 CLOSING DEVICES 087107 PROTECTIVE PLATES AND TRIM 087108 STOPS AND HOLDERS 087109 ACCESSORIES 088000 GLAZING 088100 GLASSGLAZING DIVISION 09: FINISHES 092000 PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092900 GrnSUM BOARD 09 6000 FLOOR I N G 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 098000 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT 098116 ACOUSTIC BLANKET INSULATION 099000 PAINTS AND COATINGS 099001 COMMON PAINTING AND COATING REQUIREMENTS 099121 INTERIOR PAINTED POURED CONCRETE 099122 INTERIOR PAINTED CMU 099123 INTERIOR PAINTED GYPSUM BOARD, PLASTER 099124 INTERIOR PAINTED METAL 099321 INTERIOR SEALED CONCRETE FLOORS 099413 INTERIOR TEXTURED FINISHING 099653 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES 101000 INFORMATION SPECIALTIES 101495 MISCELLANEOUS INTERIOR SIGNAGE 102000 INTERIOR SPECIALTIES 104400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES DIVISIONS 11 THROUGH 19: NOT USED FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP Table of Contents - 3 - Document 00 0110 r Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design DIVISION 20 THROUGH 21: NOT USED DIVISION 22: PLUMBING 220000 PLUMBING 220501 COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220502 DEMOLITION AND REPAIR 220503 PIPE, PIPE FITTINGS, PIPE HANGERS & VALVES 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPES AND EQUIPMENT 220703 MECHANICAL INSULATION AND FIRE STOPPING 220710 POTABLE WATER PIPE INSULATION 220800 FIRE STOPPING 221000 PLUMBING PIPES AND PUMPS 22 1116 POTABLE WATER PIPING SYSTEMS 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224001 PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 23: HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 230000 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 230501 COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS 230502 DEMOLITION AND REPAIR 230514 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM 230593 TESTING, ADTUSTING, AND BALANCING 230715 HOT WATER HEATING & RETURN PIPING INSULATION 230800 FIRE STOPPING 232000 HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 23 2113 HYDROPONIC PIPING 233000 HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 233114 LOW-PRESSURE STEEL DUCTWORK 23 3115 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES 233182 HIGH-PRESSURE DUCT 23 3713 AIR OUTLETS & INLETS DIVISION 24 THROUGH 25: NOT USED DIVISION 26: ELECTRICAL 260000 ELECTRICAL 26 0501 COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260502 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIRMENTS 260519 LME -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 265000 LIGHTING 265100 LIGHTING DIVISIONS 27: NOT USED Table of Contents -4- Document 00 0110 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design DIVISION 28: ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SEE ENGINEERING DRAWINGS DIVISIONS 29: NOT USED SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP DIVISIONS 30 THROUGH 39: NOT USED PROCESS EQUIPMENT SUBGROUP DIVISIONS 40 THROUGH 49: NOT USED END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 5 - Document 00 0110 DIVISION 01 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK 011200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY 01 1400 WORK RESTRICTIONS 012000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 013000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013 100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013500 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014 100 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 014200 REFERENCES 014301 QUALITY ASSURANCE 01 4500 QUALITY CONTROL 01 4546 DUCT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5400 CONSTRUCTION AIDS 015500 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING 015600 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES 01 5700 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016100 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016200 PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 6500 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS 017000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7300 EXECUTION 017400 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 1 - 01 0000 C'ii �` � "f i)'t' !Al®I! Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SECTION 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: A. Provisions contained in Division 01 apply to Sections of Divisions 02 through 49 of Specifications. Instructions contained in Specifications are directed to Contractor. Unless specifically provided otherwise, obligations set forth in Contract Documents are obligations of Contractor. B. Contractor will furnish total labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to perform The Work in accordance with Contract Documents. 1.2 WORK BY OWNER: A. Owner will furnish and install some portions of The Work with its own forces. Contractor will be provided with schedule of when these items are to be performed. 1. General: a. Complete work necessary to accommodate work to be performed by Owner before scheduled date for performance of such work. Contractor will be back charged for actual expenses incurred by Owner for failure to timely complete such work. 2. Work furnished and installed by Owner include, but are not limited to, following: a. High Security Cylinders and Cores: b. Carpet: END OF SECTION Summary of Work - 1 - 01 1100 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SECTION 011200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY 1.1 SUMMARY OF CONTRACTS A. Owner has issued or will issue separate contracts for operations scheduled to follow Substantial Completion. 1. General: a. Give written notice to such contractors and to Owner of any revisions of scheduled date of Substantial Completion at least 30 days in advance. Contractor will be back charged for actual expenses incurred by Owner for failure to accurately report date of Substantial Completion. b. Complete work necessary to accommodate items provided under such separate contracts before Substantial Completion. Contractor will be back charged for actual expenses incurred by Owner for failure to complete such work before Substantial Completion. 2. Carpet and Carpet Base: 3. Furnishings: 4. Latchset Cores: END OF SECTION Multiple Contract Summary - 1 - 01 1200 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SECTION 011400 WORK RESTRICTIONS 1.1 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. During construction period, Contractor will have use of premises for construction operations. Contractor will ensure that Contractor, its employees, subcontractors, and their employees comply with following requirements: 1. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits shown on Drawings. Do not disturb portions of site beyond Contract limits. 2. Do not allow alcoholic beverages, illegal drugs, or persons under their influence on Project site. 3. Do not allow use of tobacco in any form on Project Site, 4. Do not allow work on Project site on Sundays except for emergency work. 5. Refrain from using profanity or being discourteous or uncivil to others on Project Site or while performing The Work, 6. Wear shirts with sleeves, wear shoes, and refrain from wearing immodest, offensive, or obnoxious clothing, while on Project Site. 7. Do not allow playing of obnoxious and loud music on Project Site. Do not allow playing of any music within existing facilities. 8. Do not build fires on Project Site. 9. Do not allow weapons on Project Site, except those carried by law enforcement officers or other uniformed security personnel who have been retained by Owner or Contractor to provide security services. B. Existing Facilities: 1. Reasonably accommodate use of existing facilities by Owner. C. Do not load or permit any part of the structure to be loaded with a weight that will endanger its safety. Questions of structural loading as part of construction means and methods shall be addressed by a licensed structural engineer engaged by Contractor, subject to the review by Architect. END OF SECTION Work Restrictions - 1 - 01 1400 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel 1.1 PAYMENT REQUESTS 1.2 SECTION 01 2900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Use Payment Request forms provided by Owner. B. Each Payment Request will be consistent with previous requests and payments certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. C. Request Preparation - 1 . reparation:1. Complete every entry on Payment Request form. 2. Entries will match data on approved schedule of values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made. 3. Submit signed Payment Request to Architect with current Construction Schedule. D. Provide following submittals before or with submittal of Initial Payment Request: 1. List of Subcontractors. 2. Initial progress report. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 4. Submittal Schedule. E. Provide Affidavit of Contractor and Consent of Surety with Payment Request following Substantial Completion. SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit schedule of values on Owner, s standard form to Architect 20 days minimum before submission of Initial Payment Request as a necessary condition before payment will be processed. Coordinate preparation of schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Correlate line items in Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including: 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Payment Request form. END OF SECTION Payment Procedures - 1 - 012900 Project Number Project Date Project Name SECTION 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1.1 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Project designation for this Project is Benson Room 110 Laboratory to Classroom Remodel. B. This Project designation will be included on documents generated for Project by Contractor and Subcontractors, or be present on a cover letter accompanying such documents. 1.2 MULTIPLE CONTRACT COORDINATION A. Contractor shall be responsible for accurately maintaining and reporting schedule of The Work from Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. B. Contractor shall be responsible for providing Temporary Facilities And Controls for those who perform work on Project from Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. C. Contractor shall be responsible for providing Construction Waste Management And Disposal services for those who perform work on Project from Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion. D. Contractor shall be responsible for Final Cleaning for entire Project. 1.3 PROJECT MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES A. Preconstruction Conference: 1. Attend preconstruction conference and organizational meeting scheduled by Architect at Project site or other convenient location. 2. Be prepared to discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including such topics as: a. Status of permits. b. Construction schedule. c. Critical Work sequencing. d. Designation of responsible personnel. e. Procedures for processing interpretations and Modifications. f. Procedures for processing Payment Requests. g. Distribution of Contract Documents. h. Submittal of Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples, Quality Assurance / Control submittals. i. Preparation of record documents and O & M manuals. j. Use of the premises. k. Office, work, and storage areas. I. Equipment deliveries and priorities. m. Security. n. Project cleanup. o. Working hours. p. Current problems. q. General schedule of inspections by Architect and its consultants. r. General inspection of tests. 3. Architect will record minutes of meetings and distribute copies to Owner and Contractor within three working days. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend progress meetings at Project site at regularly scheduled intervals determined by Architect, at least once a month. 2. Progress meetings will be open to Owner, Architect, Subcontractors, and anyone invited by Owner, Architect, and Contractor. Project Management and Coordination 1 - 01 3100 Project Number Project Date Project Name - — 3. Be prepared to discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including following: a. Progress since last meeting. b. Whether Contractor is on schedule. c. Activities required to complete Project within Contract Time. d. Labor and materials provided under separate contracts. e. Off-site fabrication problems. f. Access. g. Site use. h. Temporary facilities and services. i. Hours of work. j. Hazards and risks. k. Project cleanup. I. Quality and Work standards. m. Status of pending modifications. n. Documentation of information for Payment Requests. o. Maintenance of Project records. 4. Architect will prepare minutes of progress meetings and distribute copies of minutes to Owner and Contractor within three working days. C. Pre -installation Conferences: 1. Attend pre -installation conferences specified in Contract Documents as scheduled by Architect. 2. Be prepared to discuss following items: a. Requirements of Contract Documents. b. Completed work is necessary for installation of items or systems. c. Conditions not in compliance with installation requirements. d. Installation and inspection schedule. e. Coordination between trades. f. Space and access limitations. g. Testing. 3. Architect will prepare meeting minutes and distribute minutes to Owner and Contractor within three working days. END OF SECTION Project Management and Coordination - 2 - 01 3100 Project # 3597 1.1 GENERAL 12-4-2008 SECTION 013300 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently before performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals required for related elements of The Work so processing will not be delayed by need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. Architect reserves right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 3. Allow sufficient review time so installation will not be delayed by time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. a. Allow 21 days for initial review. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to allow coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will promptly advise Contractor when submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process same as initial submittal. c. Allow 10 days for reprocessing each submittal. d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to Architect in sufficient time before work is to be performed to allow processing. 4. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Include name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. a. Provide space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken. b. Include following information on label for processing and recording action taken: 1) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Name and address of Architect. 4) Name and address of Contractor. 5) Name and address of Subcontractor. 6) Name and address of supplier. 7) Name of manufacturer. 8) Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 9) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 5. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using transmittal letter. On transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements, or, on form or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. 6. Submittals received from sources other than Contractor or not marked with Contractor's approval will be returned without action. PRODUCT DATA A. Submit Product Data, as required by individual Sections of Specifications. B. Mark each copy of each set of submittals to show choices and options used on Project. Where printed Product Data includes information on products that are not required for Project, mark copies to indicate information relating to Project. C. Certify that proposed product complies with requirements of Contract Documents. List any deviations from those requirements on form or separate sheet. Submittal Procedures 1 013300 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel D. Submit three copies of each required submittal unless otherwise required. Architect will return three copies marked with action taken and with corrections or modifications required. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared graphic data to accurate scale. Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-112 by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise show deviations from Contract Documents. Include following information as a minimum: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. B. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings. Standard printed information prepared without specific reference to Project is not acceptable as Shop Drawings. C. Review and designate (stamp) approval of shop drawings. Unless otherwise specified, submit to Architect three copies of shop drawings required by Contract Documents. Shop drawings not required by Contract Documents, but requested by Contractor or supplied by Subcontractor, need not be submitted to Architect for review. 1.4 SAMPLES A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. 1. Mount, display, or package Samples so as to ease review of qualities specified. Prepare Samples to match samples provided by Architect, if applicable. Include following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Sample source. c. Product name or name of manufacturer. d. Compliance with recognized standards. e. Availability and delivery time. 2. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for final check of these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. a. Where variations in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in material or product represented, submit set of three samples minimum that show approximate limits of variations. b. Refer to other specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation and similar construction characteristics. c. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to Contractor for incorporation into The Work. Such Samples shall be undamaged at time of use. On transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals. 3. Where Samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices, submit full set of choices for material or product. Preliminary submittals will be reviewed and returned with Architect's mark indicating selection and other action. 4. Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit three sets. One will be returned marked with action taken. 5. Samples, as accepted and returned by Architect, will be used for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. Submittal Procedures 2 01 3300 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Documents is observed, submittal may serve as final submittal. b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE / CONTROL A. Quality Assurance I Control submittals are design data, test reports, certificates, manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's field reports, and other documentary data affirming quality of products and installations. Submit five copies to Architect immediately upon receipt. END OF SECTION Submittal Procedures 3 01 3300 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SECTION 01 3500 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.1 ACCELERATION OF WORK A. Complete The Work in accordance with Construction Schedule. If Contractor falls behind schedule, take such actions as are necessary, at no additional expense to Owner, to bring progress of The Work back in accordance with schedule. B. Owner may request proposal for completion of The Work at date earlier than expiration of Contract Time. Promptly provide requested proposal showing cost of such acceleration of The Work. Consult with Owner and Architect regarding possible options to decrease cost of such acceleration. If Owner determines to order acceleration of The Work, change in Contract Sum and Contract Time resulting from acceleration will be included in a Change Order. 1.2 OWNER'S SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Personal Protection: 1. Contractor shall ensure: a. Positive means of fall protection, such as guardrails system, safety net system, personal fall arrest system, etc, is provided to employees whenever exposed to a fall six feet or more above a lower level. b. Personnel working on Project shall wear hard hats and safety glasses as required by regulation and hazard. c. Personnel working on Project shall wear long or short sleeve shirts, long pants, and hard -toed boots or other sturdy shoes appropriate to type and phase of work being performed. B. Contractor Tools And Equipment: 1. Contractor shall ensure: a. Tools and equipment are in good working condition, well maintained, and have necessary guards in place. b. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI) is utilized on power cords and tools. c. Scaffolding and man lifts are in good working condition, erected and maintained as required by governmental regulations. d. Ladders are in good condition, well maintained, used as specified by Manufacturer, and secured as required. C. Miscellaneous: 1. Contractor shall ensure: a. Protection is provided on protruding rebar and other similar objects. b. General Contractor Superintendent has completed the OSHA 10 -hour construction outreach training course or equivalent. c. Implementation and administration of safety program on Project. d. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are provided for substances or materials for which an MSDS is required by governmental regulations before bringing on site. e. Consistent safety training is provided to employees on Project. 2. Report accidents involving injury to employees on Project that require off-site medical treatment to Owner's designated representative. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES A. Asbestos: 1. Notify Owner immediately if Asbestos Containing Material (ACM) is encountered. END OF SECTION Special Procedures - 1 - 01 3500 Project # 3597 1.1 ASBESTOS 12-4-2008 SECTION 014100 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Contract Documents for this Project have been prepared in accordance with generally accepted professional architectural and engineering practices. Accordingly, no asbestos or products containing asbestos have been knowingly specified for this Project. Notify Architect immediately for instructions if materials containing asbestos are brought to site for inclusion in the Work. B. At Architect's direction and with Owner's approval, a certified asbestos inspector will collect samples and an independent testing laboratory will perform testing procedures on suspect materials. C. Certify that based upon best knowledge, information, inspection, and belief no building materials containing asbestos were used in construction of Project. Submit certification on form provided by Owner. END OF SECTION Regulatory Requirements - 1 - 01 4100 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SECTION 01 4200 REFERENCES 1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Industry Standards: 1. Except where Contract Documents specify otherwise, construction industry standards will apply and are made a part of Contract Documents by reference. 2. Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and standards apparently establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, refer to Architect for decision before proceeding. Quantity or quality level shown or specified will be minimum provided or performed. Actual installation may comply exactly with minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate for context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for decision before proceeding. 3. Each entity engaged in construction on Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with Contract Documents. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction activity, Contractor will obtain copies directly from publication source. 4. Trade Association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations, as referenced in Contract Documents, are defined to mean association names. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up to date as of date of Contract Documents. AABC Associated Air Balance Washington DC (202)737-0202— www.aabchq.com Council AAMA American Architectural Man- Schaumburg IL (847) 303-5859 www.aamanet.org ufacturers Assoc AASHTO American Assoc of State Washington DC (202) 624-5800 www.aashto.org Highway & Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Inst In- Farmington MI (248) 848-3700 www.aci-int.org ternational Hills AGA American Gas Assoc Washington DC 202 824-7000www.a a.or AIA American Inst of Architects Washington DC 202 626-7300 www.aiaontine.com AISC American Inst of Steel Con- Chicago IL (312) 670-2400 www.aisc.org struction AISI American Iron & Steel Inst Washington DC 202 452-7100 www.steel.or AITC American Inst of Timber Englewood CO (303) 792-0669 Construction AMCA Air Movement & Control As- Arlington IL (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org soc International Heights ANSI American National Stan- New York NY (212) 642-4900 www.ansi.org dards Inst APA Engineered Wood Assoc Tacoma WA 253 565-6600 www.apawood.org API American Petroleum Inst Washington DC 202 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air Conditioning & Refrigera- Arlington VA (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org tion Inst ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Atlanta GA (404) 636-8400 www.ashrae.org Refrigerating, & Air - Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Me- New York NY (800) 843-2763 www.asme.org chanical Engineers Interna- tional ASTM American Society for Testing West donsho- PA _F61 o) 832-9585 www.astm.org & Materials hocken References - 1 - 01 4200 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel AWI Architectural Woodwork Inst Reston VA 703 733-0600 www.awinet.or AWPA American Wood Preservers' Granbury TX (817) 326-6300 www.awpa.com Assoc AWS American Welding Society Miami FL 800 443-9353 www.amweld.or AWWA American Water Works As- Denver CO (303) 794-7711 www.awwa.org soc BHMA Builders Hardware Manufac- New York NY (212) 297-2100 www.buildershardware.co turers Assoc m BIA Brick Industry Assoc Reston VA 703 620-0010 www.bia.or CFI International Certified Floor- Kansas City MO (816) 231-4646 www.efi-installers.org covering Installers Assoc CRI Carpet & Ru Inst Dalton GA (800)882-8846 www.carpet-ruq.com CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Schaumburg IL (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org Inst CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Inst Chattanoo a TN 423 892-0137 DH Door & Hardware Inst Chantilly VA 703 222-2010 www.dhi.or EIMA EIFS Industry Members As- Morrow GA (800) 294-3462 www.eifsfacts.com soc FM FM Global Johnston RI www.fmglobal.com GA Gypsum Assoc Washington DC 202 289-5440 www.gypsum.org HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Ve- Reston VA (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org neer Assoc ICBO International Conference of Whittier CA (800) 423-6587 www.icbo.org BuildingOfficials ISSA International Slurry Surfac- Washington DC (202) 857-1160 www.slurry.org ing Assoc LPI Lightning Protection Inst Arlington IL (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org Heights MFMA Maple Flooring Manufactur- Northbrook IL (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org ers' Assoc MSS Manufacturer's Standardiza- Vienna VA (703) 281-6613 www.mss-hq.com tion Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry NAAMM National Assoc of Architec- Chicago IL (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org tural Metal Manufacturers NEC National Electric Code from NFPA). NEMA National Electrical Manufac- Rosslyn VA (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org turer's Assoc NFPA National Fire Protection As- Quincy MA (800) 344-3555 www.nfpa.org soc NFRC National Fenestration Rating Silver Spring MD (301) 589-6372 www.nfrc.org Council NSF NSF International Ann Arbor MI 734 769-8010 www.nsf.or PCA Portland Cement Assoc Skokie IL 847 966-6200 www, ortcement.or PCI Precast/ Prestressed Con- Chicago IL (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org crete Inst PEI Porcelain Enamel Inst Nashville TN 615 385-5357 www.pocelainenamel.com SDI Steel Deck Inst Fax River IL (847) 462-1930 www.sdi.org Grove SDI Steel Door Inst Cleveland OH 440 899-0010 www.steeldoor.or SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Chicago IL (312) 644-6610 Manufacturer's Assoc SJI Steel Joist Inst M rtle Beach SC 843 626-1995 www.steeljoist.or SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Condition- Chantilly VA (703) 803-2980 www.smacna.org ing Contractors National As- soc SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Pensacola FL (850) 434-2611 Bureau References - 2 _ 01 4200 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SSMA Steel Stud Manufacturer's Assoc Chicago IL (312) 332-0405 www.ssma.com TCA Tile Council of America Anderson SC 864 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TPI Truss Plate Inst Madison WI 608 833-5900 www.epe.gov UL Underwriters Laboratories Northbrook IL 847 272-8800 www.ul.com WDMA Window and Door Manufac- turer's Assoc Des Plaines IA (847) 299-5200 www.nwwda.org WWPA Western Wood Products Assoc Portland OR (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org B. Federal Government Agencies: 1. Names and titles of federal government standard or specification producing agencies are often abbreviated. Following acronyms or abbreviations referenced in Contract Documents represent names of standard or specification producing agencies of federal government. Names and addresses are subject to change but are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up to date as of date of Contract Documents. CS Commercial Standard (U S Washington DC (202) 512-0000 www.doe.gov Department of Commerce EPA Environmental Protection Washington DC (202) 260-2090 www.epe.gov Agency FCC Federal Communications Washington DC (202) 418-0126 www.fcc.gov Commission FS Federal Specifications Unit Washington DC (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov Available from GSA MIL Military Standardization Philadelphia PA (215) 697-2179 www.dod.gov Documents (U S Department of Defense OSHA Occupational Safety & Washington DC 202) 219-8148 www.osha.gov Health Administration (U S De artment of Labor PS Product Standard of NBS (U Washington DC (202) 512-1800 www.doc.gov S Department of Commerce C. Governing Regulations/ Authorities: 1. Contact authorities having jurisdiction directly for information and decisions having a bearing on the Work. 2. Obtain copies of regulations required to be retained at Project Site, available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need for such reference. END OF SECTION References - 3 - 014200 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SECTION 014300 QUALITY ASSURANCE: GENERAL 1.1 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. Where heading 'VMR (Value Managed Relationship) Suppliers /Installers' is used to identify list of specified suppliers or installers, Owner has established relationships that extend beyond the requirements of this Project. No other suppliers I installers will be acceptable. Follow specified procedures to preserve relationships between Owner and specified suppliers I installers and advantages that accrue to Owner from those relationships. B. Where heading 'Acceptable Installers' is used to identify list of specified installers, use only one of listed installers. No others will be acceptable. END OF SECTION Quality Assurance: General - 1 - 01 4300 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SECTION 01 4500 QUALITY CONTROL i i 1.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES A. Inspection and testing by Owner, Architect, Contractor, their consultants or government agencies to examine Work performed by Contractor does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Documents. B. Quality control services include inspections, tests and related actions including reports, performed by Contractor. They do not include inspections, tests or related actions performed by Architect, Owner, governing authorities or independent agencies hired by Owner or Architect. 1. Contractor and each agency engaged to do inspections, tests, and similar services will coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required services with minimum of delay. In addition, Contractor and each agency will coordinate activities to avoid necessity of removing and replacing i construction to accommodate inspections and tests. Contractor is responsible for scheduling times 1 for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities. ; 2. Provide inspections, tests, and similar quality control services specified in individual specification Sections or required by governing authorities. 3. Where results of inspections, tests, or similar services show that the Work does not comply with Contract Document requirements, correct the deficiencies in the Work. r 4. Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar services and provide j reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently before operations to allow ` assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to - a. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. b. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or helping agency in taking samples. c. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of samples to testing laboratories. d. Providing agency with preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by testing agency. e. Securing and protecting samples and test equipment at Project site. C. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample -taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Contract Documents in making such repairs. D. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired construction. E. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of who caused the inspection, testing, or similar services. 1.2 TESTING AND INSPECTING SERVICES A. Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, only with written approval of Architect. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on Project will be licensed and authorized to operate in the jurisdiction in which Project is located. B. Duties of Testing Agency: 1. Independent testing agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified in individual specification Sections will cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of its duties and will provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests. 2. Agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. Quality Control 1 01 4500 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel 3. Agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of Contract Documents, or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 4. Agency will not perform any duties of Contractor. C. Submittals: 1. Independent testing agency will submit certified written report of each inspection, test, or similar service, to Architect, in duplicate, unless Contractor is responsible for service. If Contractor is responsible for service, submit certified written report of each inspection, test, or similar service through Contractor, in duplicate. a. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to governing authority, when authority so directs. b. Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service will include, but not be limited to: 1) Date of issue. 2) Project title and number. 3) Name, address and telephone number of testing agency. 4) Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5) Names of individuals making the inspection or test. 6) Designation of the Work and test method. 7) Identification of product and specification Section. 8) Complete inspection or test data. 9) Test results and interpretations of test results. 10) Ambient conditions at time of sample -taking and testing. 11) Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract Document requirements. 12) Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13) Recommendations on retesting. END OF SECTION Quality Control 2 01 4500 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SECTION 014546 DUCT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Test, balance, and adjust air duct systems as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23: a. Completing installation and start-up of mechanical systems, and changing sheaves, belts, and dampers as required for correct balance. b. Assisting Balancing Agency in testing and balancing of mechanical system. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A Performance Requirements: 1. Perform testing and balancing in complete accordance with Associated Air Balance Council Standards for Field Measurement & Instructions, Form P1266, Volume I. Record test data on AABC standard forms or facsimile. 2. Noise level shall not exceed PNC 35 in Chapel or Cultural Center when all mechanical equipment is operating. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance / Control: 1. Four copies of complete test data for evaluation and approval. 2. Test And Balance Report: a. Complete with logs, data, and records as required herein. Print logs, data, and records on white bond paper bound together in report form. b. Certified accurate and complete by Balancing Agency's certified test and balance engineer. c. Contain following general data in format selected by Balancing Agency. 1) Project Number. 2) Project Title. 3) Project Location. 4) Project Architect and Mechanical Engineer. 5) Test and Balance Agency and Certified Engineer. 6) Contractor and mechanical sub -contractor. 7) Dates tests were performed. 8) Certification Document. 9) Report Forms similar to AABC Standard format. d. Report shall include following: 1) Preface suggesting abnormalities and problems encountered. 2) Instrumentation List including type, model, manufacturer, serial number, and calibration dates. 3) System Identification reporting location of VAV boxes, zones, supply, return, and exhaust openings. 4) Record following for each piece of air handling equipment: a) Manufacturer, model number, and serial number. b) Design and manufacturer rated data. c) Actual CFM. d) Suction and discharge static pressure of each fan. Duct Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing - 1 - 014546 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel e) Outside -air and return -air total CFM. f) Actual operating current, voltage, and brake horsepower of each fan motor. g) Final RPM of each motor. h) Fan and motor sheave manufacturer, model, size, number of grooves and center distance. i) Belt size and quantity. j) Static -pressure controls final operating set points. 3. Bind approved copy of report in Operations And Maintenance Manual for Division 23. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Work of this Section shall be performed by independent Air Testing And Balance Agency specializing in testing and balancing of heating, ventilating, and cooling systems to balance, adjust, and test air moving equipment, air distribution, and exhaust systems. 2. Agency shall provide proof of having successfully completed at least five years of specialized experience in air and hydronic system balancing. Work by this Agency shall be done under direct supervision of qualified heating and ventilating engineer employed by Agency. 3. Agency shall be approved in writing by Architect. 4. Neither Architect's engineering consultant or anyone performing work on this Project under other Sections of Division 23 shall be permitted to do this work. 1.5 SCHEDULING A. Award test and balance subcontract to Agency upon receipt of Notice To Proceed to allow Agency to schedule this work in cooperation with other Sections involved and to comply with completion date. B. During construction, Agency shall inspect installation of pipe systems, sheet metal work, temperature controls, and other component parts of mechanical systems. Perform inspections as follows. 1. One inspection when 60 percent of ductwork is installed. 2. One inspection when 90 percent of equipment is installed. C. Do not begin air testing and balancing until: 1. After completion of air cooling, heating, and exhaust systems including installation of specialties, devices, and new filters. 2. Proper function of control system components including electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water reset, and fire and freeze stats has been verified. 3. Automatic temperature controls have been calibrated and set for design operating conditions. 4. Verification of proper thermostat calibration and setting of control components such as static pressure controllers and other devices that may need set points changed during process of balancing system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Heating, ventilating, and cooling systems and equipment shall be in full operation and continue in operation during each working day of testing and balancing. Duct Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing - 2 - 014546 r Project # 3597 12-4-2008 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel f A. Site Tests: 1. If requested, conduct tests in presence of Architect. 2. Instruments used by Agency shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. 3. Air Testing And Balancing Procedure: a. Perform tests at high and low speeds of multi -speed systems and single speed systems. Perform following testing and balancing functions in accordance with Associated Air Balance Council National Standards: 1) Fan Speeds: a) Air Handling Units (with variable pitch pulleys and sheaves): Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve design CFM requirements. b) Furnaces And Fan Coil Units (with direct drive motors): Set fan speed to lowest possible setting that will achieve design CFM requirements. Adjust down from Contractor setting, if necessary. 2) Current And Voltage: Measure and record motor current and voltage. 3) Pitot -Tube Traverse: a) Make measurements in duct where velocity is uniform, 7-1/2 duct diameters downstream 2 duct diameters minimum upstream from any turbulence, I.E. elbow, damper, take -off, etc. b) Perform pitot-tube traverse of main supply and return ducts to obtain total CFM. c) Perform pitot-tube traverse of outside air duct serving each piece of air moving equipment. (1) Where single trunk serves multiple pieces of equipment, perform, pitot-tube traverse of duct branch serving each piece of equipment as well as pitot-tube traverse of total air flow in trunk with all pieces of equipment operating. (2) Where pitot-tube traverse is not possible or if pitot-tube traverse is unreliable, flow hood measurement over exterior intake louver or grille is acceptable. 4) Static Pressure: Test and record system static pressures, including suction and discharge static pressure of each fan. 5) Air Temperature: Take wet and dry bulb air temperatures on entering and leaving side of each cooling coil. Dry bulb temperatures shall be taken on entering and leaving side of each heating unit. 6) Main Ducts: Adjust main ducts to within design CFM requirements and traverse for total CFM quantities. 7) Branch Ducts: Adjust branch ducts to within design CFM requirements. Multi -diffuser branch ducts shall have at least one outlet or inlet volume damper completely open. 8) Tolerances: Test and balance each diffuser, grille, and register to within 10 percent of design requirements. 9) Description: Record size, type, and manufacturer of each diffuser, grille, and register on air outlet data sheets. 10) Drafts: Adjust diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts. b. Permanently mark all outside air, supply air, and return air damper positions after balancing has been completed. 4. Smoke testing, or some other approved means, may be required to determine leak locations if air balance report indicates that any system's CFM total is less than 10 percent of design CFM. Prior to test, verify that system's duct joints have been sealed as specified and that air moving device in question is supplying required design system air flow. Architect will approve test method required. If smoke test is selected, use following procedure. Provide necessary precautions to protect those performing or observing test from being exposed to smoke. a. Use zinc chloride smoke candles, titanium tetrachloride ampules or sticks, or other devices acceptable to Architect to generate smoke. b. Close openings in duct except for one opening at farthest end of duct run. c. Circulate smoke at pressurized condition of 1/2 inch 13 mm minimum water gauge static pressure. d. Report findings to Architect in writing. B. Final Inspection And Adjustments: 1. System shall be balanced and reports submitted to Architect before final inspection. Duct Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing - 3 - 014546 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel Balancing Agency shall be represented at final inspection meeting by qualified testing personnel with balancing equipment and two copies of air balancing test report. a. Architect will choose and direct spot balancing of one zone. Differences between the spot balance and test report will be justification for requiring repeat of testing and balancing for entire building. If recheck testing demonstrates measured flow deviation of 10 percent or more from recorded information on report, report will be rejected and new inspection and report will be made and resubmitted. b. Perform re -balancing in presence of Architect and subject to its approval. c. If re -balancing is required, submit revised air test and balance reports to Architect before Substantial Completion. d. Spot balance and rebalance shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION Duct Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing - 4 - 01 4546 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SECTION 01 5400 CONSTRUCTION AIDS E 1.1 SCAFFOLDING, PLATFORMS, STAIRS, ETC A. Furnish and maintain equipment such as temporary stairs, ladders, ramps, platforms, scaffolds, hoists, runways, derricks, chutes and elevators as required for proper execution of The Work. B. Apparatus, equipment, and construction will meet requirements of applicable laws and safety regulations. END OF SECTION Construction Aids - 1 - 01 5400 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SECTION 01 5500 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING 1.1 TEMPORARY PARKING AREAS A. Contractor parking will be accommodated on Center Street west of the building. 1.2 STAGING AREAS A. Staging will be accommodated on Center Street west of the building. END OF SECTION Vehicular Access and Parking - 1 - 01 5500 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SECTION 01 5600 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES 1.1 GENERAL A. Protection Of Existing Improvements: Protect streets, private roads, and sidewalks, including overhead protection where required. Repair damage to existing improvements caused by construction activities. 1.2 TEMPORARY BARRICADES A. Comply with standards and code requirements in erecting barricades, warning signs, and lights. B. Take necessary precautions to protect persons, including members of the public, from injury or harm. 1.3 TEMPORARY SECURITY BARRIERS A. Secure materials and equipment stored on site. B. Maintain exterior building security until Substantial Completion C. Secure building at the end of each work day. 1.4 TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION A. Before commencing site work, build and maintain protective fencing around existing trees and vegetation as shown on the drawings. B. Individual trees will have protective fencing built beyond drip line. C. Build protective fencing around groups of trees and other vegetation as indicated on Drawings. D. Keep areas within protective fencing undisturbed and do not use for any purpose. E. Remove and replace vegetation that dies or is damaged beyond repair due to construction activities. END OF SECTION Temporary Barriers and Enclosures - 1 - 01 5600 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SECTION 01 5700 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. Take precautions necessary to prevent erosion and transportation of soil downstream, to adjacent properties, and into on-site or off-site drainage systems. B. Develop, install, and maintain an erosion control plan if required by law. C. Repair and correct damage caused by erosion. 1.2 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS A. Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and reduce possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near site. B. Provide protection against weather (rain, winds, storms, frost, or heat) to maintain all work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free from injury or damage. C. Protect excavation, trenches, and building from damage from rain water, spring water, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers, and all other water. For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included under individual Sections, comply with requirements of applicable local regulations. Where feasible, use permanent facilities. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. Filter out excessive amounts of soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge. D. Comply with governing ordinances relating to weed control and removal. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls - 1 - 015700 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SECTION 01 6100 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide products that comply with Contract Documents, that are undamaged, and, unless otherwise indicated, new and unused at time of installation. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for complete installation and for intended use and effect. B. Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on surfaces of products that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on building exterior. 1. Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surface or, where required for observation after installation, on accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 2. Provide permanent nameplates on items of service -connected or power -operated equipment. Locate on easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. Nameplate will contain following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. C. Where specifications describe a product or assembly by specifying exact characteristics required, with or without use of brand or trade name, provide product or assembly that provides specified characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. D. Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are recommended by manufacturer for application described. General overall performance of product is implied where product is specified for specific application. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or by manufacturer's certification of performance. Where specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select product that complies with standards, codes or regulations specified. F. Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, Architect's decision will be final on whether proposed product matches satisfactorily. Where no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily nor complies with other specified requirements, refer to Architect. G. Where specified product requirements include phrase ' ... as selected from manufacturers standard colors, patterns, textures ... 'or similar phrase, select product and manufacturer that comply with other specified requirements. Architect will select color, pattern, and texture from product line selected. K Refer to individual Specification Sections and Allowance provisions in Division 01 for allowances that control product selection, and for procedures required for processing such selections. Remove and replace products and materials not specified in Contract Documents but installed in the Work with specified products and materials at no additional cost to Owner and for no increase in Contract time. END OF SECTION Common Product Requirements - 1 - 016100 Project # 3597 1.1 SUMMARY 12-4-2008 SECTION 01 6200 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel PRODUCT OPTIONS A. When option of selecting between two or more products is given, product selected will be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. B. Non -conforming work as covered in Article 12.3 of General Conditions applies, but is not limited, to use of non-specified products or manufacturers. C. Product selection is governed by Contract Documents and governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Procedures governing product selection include: 1. Substitutions And Equal Products: a. Generally speaking, substitutions for specified products and systems, as defined in the Uniform Commercial Code, are not acceptable. However, equal products may be approved upon compliance with Contract Document requirements. b. Approved Products / Manufacturers / Suppliers / Installers: 1) Category One: a) Owner has established 'Value Managed Relationships' that extend beyond requirements of this Project. No substitutions or equal products will be allowed on this Project. b) Follow specified procedures to preserve relationships between Owner and specified manufacturers / suppliers and advantages that accrue to Owner from those relationships. 2) Category Two: a) Owner has established National Contracts that contain provisions extending beyond requirements of this Project. No substitutions or equal products will be allowed on this Project. b) Follow specified procedures to preserve relationships between Owner and specified manufacturers / suppliers and advantages that accrue to Owner from those relationships. 3) Category Three: a) Specified products are provided to Church Projects under a National Account Program. Use these products to preserve advantages that accrue to Owner from those programs. No substitutions or equal products will be allowed on this Project. 4) Category Four: a) Provide only specified products available from manufacturers listed. No substitutions, private -labeled, or equal products, or mixing of manufacturers' products is allowed on this Project. b) In Sections where lists recapitulating Manufacturers previously mentioned in Section are included under heading 'Manufacturers' or 'Approved Manufacturers', this is intended as a convenience to Contractor as a listing of contact information only. It is not intended that all manufacturers in list may provide products where specific products and manufacturers are listed elsewhere in Section. c. Acceptable Products / Manufacturers / Suppliers / Installers: 1) Type One: Use specified products / manufacturers unless approval to use other products / manufacturers has been obtained from Architect by Addendum. 2) Type Two: Use specified products / manufacturers unless approval to use other products and manufacturers has been obtained from Architect in writing before installing or applying unlisted or private -labeled products. 3) Use'Equal Product Approval Request Form' to request approval of equal products, manufacturers, or suppliers before bidding or before installation, as noted in individual Sections. d. Quality / Performance Standard Products / Manufacturers: 1) Class One: Use specified product / manufacturer or equal product from specified manufacturers only. Product Options - 1 - 01 6200 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel 2) Class Two: Use specified product / manufacturer or equal product from any manufacturer. 3) Products / manufacturers used shall conform to Contract Document requirements. END OF SECTION Product Options - 2 - 01 6200 Project # 3597 1.1 SUMMARY 12-4-2008 SECTION 01 6500 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. 1.2 DELIVERY A. Schedule delivery to reduce long-term storage at site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. B. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. C. Deliver products to site in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. D. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with Contract Documents, and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 1.3 STORAGE A. Store products at site in manner that will simplify inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. B. Store heavy materials away from Project structure so supporting construction will not be endangered. C. Store products subject to damage by elements above ground, under cover in weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Delivery, Storage, and Handling Requirements - 1 - 01 6500 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 SECTION 01 7300 EXECUTION 1.1 COMMON DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel A. Before beginning work on Project, inspect areas in which work will be performed. 1. Photograph or video tape existing conditions, including surrounding property if necessary, which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective demolition. 2. File copies of photographs / video tapes with Architect before beginning demolition work. B. Scheduling: 1. Coordinate with Owner for equipment and materials to be removed by Owner. C. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. Cease demolition operations and notify Architect immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Do not resume demolition operations until safety is restored. D. Cover and protect furniture, equipment, and fixtures from soiling and damage when demolition work is performed in rooms and areas from which such items have not been removed. 1.2 COMMON INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations to extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. Notify Architect of conflicts between Manufacturer's installation instructions and Contract Document requirements. B. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure work true to line and level. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located, and aligned with other Work. Allow for expansion and building movement. C. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work. Arrange joints in exposed work to obtain best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to Architect for final decision. D. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure best possible results. Isolate each part of completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration. E. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to reduce necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. F. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not shown, install individual components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry or local codes for that application. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to Architect for final decision. END OF SECTION Execution - 1 - 01 7300 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SECTION 01 7400 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 1.1 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. B. Keep premises broom clean during progress of the Work. C. During handling and installation, protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from soiling, damage, or deterioration until Substantial Completion. D. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary throughout construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure ability to operate without damaging effects. E. Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during construction period. F. Before and during application of painting materials, clear area where such work is in progress of debris, rubbish, and building materials that may cause dust. Sweep floors and vacuum as required and take all possible steps to keep area dust free. G. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to avoid damage and deterioration. H. Place extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated work have become Owner's property as directed by Owner or Architect. Construction Waste Management And Disposal: 1. Remove waste materials and rubbish caused by employees, Subcontractors, and contractors under separate contract with Owner and dispose of legally. Remove unsuitable or damaged materials and debris from building and from property. a. Provide adequate waste receptacles and dispose of materials when full. b. Properly store volatile waste and remove daily. c. Do not deposit waste into storm drains, sanitary sewers, streams, or waterways. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. 2. Do not burn waste materials or build fires on site. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. 1.2 FINAL CLEANING A. Immediately before Substantial Completion, thoroughly clean building and area where The Work was performed. Remove all rubbish from under and about building, landscaped areas and parking lot and leave building and Project Site ready for occupancy by Owner. B. Comply with individual manufacturer's cleaning instructions. C. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program, including but not limited to: 1. Interior Cleaning: a. Clean inside glazing, exercising care not to scratch glass. b. Remove marks, stains, fingerprints and dirt. c. Clean and polish woodwork and finish hardware. d. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. Cleaning and Waste Management - 1 - 01 7400 Project # 3597 2. 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel e. Clean surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean light fixtures and lamps. f. Clean other fixtures and equipment and remove stains, paint, dirt, and dust. g. Remove temporary floor protection and clean floors. Exterior Cleaning: a. Clean outside glazing, exercising care not to scratch glass. b. Remove marks, stains, and dirt from exterior surfaces. c. Clean and polish finish hardware. d. Remove temporary protection systems. e. Clean dirt, mud, and other foreign material from paving, sidewalks, and gutters. f. Remove trash, debris, and foreign material from landscaped areas. END OF SECTION Cleaning and Waste Management - 2 - 01 7400 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SECTION 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES fi�itH��I�:L•\Ri A. Schedule closeout procedures in the four weeks before expiration of Contract Time. Weeks will be marked by three Architect's weekly visits before Final Closeout Review, Final Closeout Review, and expiration of Contract Time. B. Date of Substantial Completion shall fall within week between Architect's final weekly visit and Final Closeout Review. Date of Substantial Completion shall not occur until Construction Schedule shows completion of construction work, unless agreed to by Architect and included on Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1.2 PRELIMINARY CLOSEOUT REVIEWS A. Confirm with Architect when Substantial Completion of The Work will be achieved. 1. Final three Architect's weekly visits will serve as Preliminary Closeout Reviews to determine if Final Closeout Review will occur as scheduled and that Substantial Completion of the Work will be achieved by that date. 2. By final weekly Architect visit, notify Owner and Architect of date when Substantial Completion of The Work will be achieved. B. Arrange with Architect date for Final Closeout Review to confirm Substantial Completion. 1.3 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. Before Final Closeout Review: 1. Deliver Closeout Submittals to Architect. 2. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items as required by the Contract Documents. 3. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of Owner's maintenance personnel as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements. 5. Complete final cleaning requirements. 1.4 FINAL CLOSEOUT REVIEW A. Participate in Final Closeout Review. B. When Owner and Architect have confirmed that Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion of The Work, Owner, Architect, and Contractor will execute Certificate of Substantial Completion that contains: 1. Date of Substantial Completion. 2. Punch List of Work not yet accepted. 3. Amount to be withheld for completion of Punch List work. 4. Time period for completion of Punch List work. 5. Amount of liquidated damages set forth in Supplementary Conditions to be assessed if Contractor fails to complete Punch List work within time set forth in Certificate. C. Final Acceptance Conference: 1. Notify Architect in writing when work on Punch List has been completed. 2. Arrange with Architect date and time for Final Acceptance Conference. Closeout Procedures - 1 - 01 7700 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel 3. When Owner and Architect have confirmed that Contractor has completed Punch List work, Architect will issue letter to Owner authorizing final payment. END OF SECTION Closeout Procedures 2- 01 7700 Project # 3597 12-4-2008 Benson Laboratory 110 to Classroom Remodel SECTION 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1.1 GENERAL A. Workmanship bonds, final certifications, equipment check-out sheets, and similar documents. B. Releases enabling Owner unrestricted use of The Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. C. Project photographs, damage or settlement survey, and similar record information required by Contract Documents. 1.2 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operations And Maintenance Manuals that include: 1. Copy of complete Project Manual including Addenda, Modifications as defined in General Conditions, and other interpretations issued during construction. a. Mark these documents to show variations in actual Work performed in comparison with text of specifications and Modifications. Show substitutions, selection of options, and similar information, particularly on elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. b. Note related record drawing information and Product Data. 2. Product Data: One copy of each Product Data submittal required by Contract Documents. 3. Operations and maintenance manuals required by Contract Documents. 4. Certifications required by Contract Documents. 5. Copies of warranties required by Contract Documents. 1.3 WARRANTIES A. When written guarantees beyond one year after substantial completion are required by Contract Documents, secure such guarantees and warranties properly addressed and signed in favor of Owner. Include these documents in Operations & Maintenance Manuals specified above. B. Delivery of guarantees and warranties will not relieve Contractor from obligations assumed under other provisions of Contract Documents. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect from deterioration and loss in secure, fire -resistive location. Provide access to record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Maintain clean, undamaged set of Drawings. Mark set to show actual installation where installation varies from the Work as originally shown. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. 2. Mark new information that is important to Owner, but was not shown on Drawings. 3. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable. END OF SECTION Closeout Submittals - 1 - 01 7800 Kik" DIVISION 03: CONCRETE 030000 CONCRETE 030130 REHABILITATION OF CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 031000 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 031511 ANCHORS AND INSERTS 036000 GROUTING 036213 NON-METALLICNON-SHRINKOROUT END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 1 - 030000 44 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 03 0130 REHABILITATION OF CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnishing and installing concrete patching as described in Contract Documents, 1.2 MATERIALS A. Patching: 1. Mortar to be composed of white and gray cement combined with lime and selected aggregates to produce composition of original concrete, matching strength, thermal expansion, color, and texture. Formulate to account for shrinkage during curing. 2. Patching Anchors: Match existing in size and type, fabricated from AISI Type 302/304 stainless steel. 1.3 MIXES A. Concrete Patching: Proportion mix with two parts cement, two parts lime, and six parts clean white sand. 1.4 APPLICATION A. Concrete Patching: 1. Apply patching mortar to hairline cracks to less than 1/16 inch wide. Brush -apply cement and water mixture to fill voids, artificially weathering after curing. 2. Anchorages: a. Identify locations of exposed metal anchorages by neatly cutting and chiseling away concrete from score line to score line. b. Remove rust from reusable anchorages by wire brushing and sandblasting followed by epoxy coating. c. Replace unusable anchorages. 3. Patching: a. After removal of damaged concrete to solid stable substrate, prepare substrate. b. Roughen surfaces by chiseling to mechanically bond new patch to old contact surface. c. Wet substrate, keeping surface moist for minimum of one hour before installing parging ! patch. d. Scrub substrate with cement paste or apply liquid bonding agent to promote bonding. e. Formulate parging / patch to match original color and texture of existing concrete, mixing in epoxy resins, latex, and acrylics to increase bond. f. Apply patch in dense compacted 2 inch layers, roughening in between for bonding. g. Sculpt and form to exactly match historic shape, profile, and score lines. h. Keep parging / patch damp, moist, and away from exposure to direct sunlight for 72 hours minimum. END OF SECTION Rehabilitation of Cast -in -Place Concrete - 1 - 030130 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 031511 ANCHORS AND INSERTS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Concrete anchors and inserts not specified elsewhere. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 0523: Quality of anchor bolts. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product literature for each item. B. Quality Assurance / Control: Manufacturer's installation recommendations for each item. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Adhesive Anchors: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Ultrabond by Adhesives Technology Corp. b. HIT HY-150 System or HIT HY-MAX System by Hilti. c. Power -Fast System by Powers Fastening. d. EPCON System by Ramset / Redhead. e. SET Adhesive by Simpson. f. Pro-Poxy by Unitex. g. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. B. Drilled -In Anchors: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Wedge Anchors by Adhesives Technology Corp. b. Kwik Bolt 3 by Hilti. c. SUP -R -STUDS by MKT Fastening. d. Power -Stud by Powers Fastening. e. TruBolt Carbon Wedge Anchors by Ramset / Redhead. f. Wedge -All Wedge Anchors by Simpson. g. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Contact Information: 1. Adhesives Technology Corp, Pampano Beach, FL www.atc.ws. 2. Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK www.us.hilti.com. 3. MKT Fastening Corp, Lonoke, AR www.mktfastening.com. 4. Powers Fasteners Inc, New Rochelle, NY www.powers.com. 5. Redhead, Div ITW, Addison, IL www.itw-redhead.com. 6. Simpson Strong -Tie, Dublin, CA www.strongtie.com. Anchors And Inserts - 1 - 031511 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 7. Unitex, Kansas City, MO www.unitex-chemicals.com. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Epoxy Anchors: Per manufacturer specifications. B. Drilled -in Anchors: Per manufacturer specifications. END OF SECTION Austin Welding Lab Design Anchors And Inserts - 2 - 03 1511 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 03 6213 NON-METALLIC NON -SHRINK GROUTING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install structural grout as described in Contract Documents. a. For securing anchor bolts and hardware in concrete. b. For securing anchor bolts and hardware in masonry. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 0516: Masonry grout. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society For Testing And Materials: 1. ASTM C 1107-02, 'Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Non - shrink).' PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Commercial non -shrink grout conforming to requirements of ASTM C 1107, Type B or Type C and providing compressive strength of 6000 psi minimum. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1. Normal Construction Grout A by Bonsal American, Charlotte, NC www.bonsal.com. 2. Advantage 1107 Grout by Dayton Superior Corporation, Oregon, IL www.daVtonsuDeriorchemical.com. 3. NS Grout by Euclid Chemical Co, Cleveland, OH www.euclidchemical.com, 4. Construction Grout by Five Star Products Inc, Fairfield, CT www.fivestarproducts.com. 5. Duragrout by L&M Construction Chemicals Inc, Omaha, NE www.Imcc.com. 6. Sonneborn / deGussa Building Systems, Shakopee, MN www.chemrex.com. 7. Horn Grout by TAMMS Industries Inc, Kirkland IL www.tamms.com. 8. U S Spec MP Grout by U S Mix Products Co, Denver, CO www.usspec.com. 9. CG -86 Grout by W R Meadows, Hampshire, IL www.wrmeadows.com. 10. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Completely eliminate air pockets and provide full contact between grout and item being grouted. Do not exceed Manufacturer's recommended thickness. Non -Metallic Non -Shrink Grouting - 1 - 036213 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design END OF SECTION Non -Metallic Non -Shrink Grouting - 2 - 036213 DIVISION 04: MASONRY 040000 MASONRY 04 0121 UNIT MASONRY REPOINTING 040131 UNIT MASONRY CLEANING 040$13 CEMENT AND LIME MASONRY MORTARING 040$16 MASONRY GROUTING 042000 UNIT MASONRY 042223 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 1 - 040000 Project # 3885 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 04 0121 UNIT MASONRY REPOINTING A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Remove existing mortar to specified depth, clean joints, and tuck -point as described in Contract Documents. 2. Remove, clean, and reinstall existing masonry units as described in Contract Documents. 3. Remove existing masonry units and replace with new masonry units as described in Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society For Testing And Materials: 1. ASTM C 150-04, 'Standard Specification for Portland Cement.' 2. ASTM C 207-01, 'Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Hydrated Lime: Meet requirements of ASTM C 207, Type S. B. Portland Cement: Meet requirements of ASTM C 150, Type II, White (non -staining). C. Aggregate: Match existing as much as possible. Generally, sand with rounded edges is preferred. D. Color: Match existing mortar color unless otherwise agreed to. This will generally require fresh mortar to be slightly darker than existing to compensate for natural bleaching with age. E. Water: Clean, drinkable. 2.2 MIXES A. Pointing mortar shall be softer or no harder than existing mortar. Unless agreed to otherwise, mix may be one part lime and 2 parts sand. Portland cement may be added up to 20 percent of total lime and sand. Use no admixtures. B. Mix dry ingredients, then add about half water and mix for five minutes. Add additional water slowly until proper consistency is reached. Use mortar within 30 minutes. Do not re -temper. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Interface With Other Work: Coordinate work of this Section with general masonry cleaning so all, except final pointing, is completed prior to general masonry cleaning, if any. Unit Masonry Repointing - 1 - 040121 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design B. Remove mortar from joint 2-1/2 times deeper than joint width or one inch, whichever is greater, with hammer and cold chisel or other suitable hand tools. Do not use power tools unless it can be I demonstrated to Architect's satisfaction that masonry surfaces will not be damaged. C. Remove masonry from designated areas, if any, and clean mortar from salvageable removed units and from surrounding units in wall. Re-lay masonry units in wall leaving raked joint to approximate depth of existing joints prepared for repointing. Mortar for re-laying shall be as specified in Section 04061. D. Clean joints with combination of water flushing and brushing with bristle brush. E. Work fresh mortar from 'hawk' to joint with jointing tool. First fill recessed areas, which are deeper than standard chiseled depth, and then proceed to fill raked joint using several layers of mortar and working tool in one direction only. Each layer of mortar shall be thumbprint hard before succeeding layer is applied. Where corners of face brick have eroded, it may be necessary to recess mortar to some degree in order to maintain consistent visual width of joints. F. Perform final tooling when mortar is thumbprint hard. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean face of masonry one to two hours after mortar has set. 1. Use plain stiff bristle brush. 2. If mortar has become too hard, use brush and plain water and wooden paddle or, if necessary, a chisel. 3. If harsher cleaning methods are required, allow mortar to cure 30 days before commencing. END OF SECTION Unit Masonry Repointing - 2 - 040121 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 04 0131 UNIT MASONRY CLEANING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Clean exterior masonry surfaces as described in Contract Documents. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: I. This specification describes cleaning systems designed to effectively clean and restore exterior masonry surfaces. 2. Selection of specific cleaners to be used shall be dependent on type of substrate, its condition, and results of tests conducted at job site as specified below. 3. Sandblasting and use of non-proprietary acids, alkalis, powdered or liquid, is not permitted. 4. Application shall be in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and as approved in writing by Owner. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Applicators performing work of this section shall have five years minimum experience using specified restorative cleaning techniques. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Adhere to applicable City, State, and Federal EPA laws and requirements. 2. Require applicators to observe applicable Federal and State Agency, industry, and Manufacturer recommended safety regulations and precautions. Applicators shall wear safety goggles, rubber gloves, and plastic or rubber rain suits so as to avoid splash to skin or eyes. C. Field Samples: 1. Fundamental consideration for selection of appropriate cleaning procedures shall be that materials and techniques adopted do minimal or no damage to masonry substrates while achieving desired degree of cleaning. 2. Procedures shall include evaluation of materials and techniques proposed for protection of surrounding and adjacent non -masonry surfaces from cleaning solutions and rinse waters. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Purchase and store on site in factory sealed containers sufficient cleaning materials to complete Project. Containers shall be available for inspection. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Project Environmental Requirements: 1. Conduct cleaning operations at time of year when treated masonry surfaces will have adequate time to thoroughly dry without fear of freezing. Do not perform masonry cleaning at temperatures below 40 deg F, or when local Weather Service reports indicate temperatures below 40 deg F during ensuing 24 hours are imminent, unless heated rinse water will be used and if approved in writing by Architect. Unit Masonry Cleaning 1 - 040131 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 2. Do not perform masonry cleaning during winds sufficiently strong to spread sprayed compound to adjacent unprotected surfaces. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Prewash 1: 1. Formulated for use with Restoration Cleaner I, Limestone Afterwash, and Restorer I. 2. Acts as'carbon solubilizer' and assists in removing heavy carbon encrustations from brick, terra cotta, sandstone, limestone, and most other masonry. 3. Type One Acceptable Products: a. Sure Klean 766 Prewash. b. Diedrich 808 Limestone Prewash. c. Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 016200. B. Restoration Cleaner I: 1. For removing atmospheric staining with heavy deposits of carbon and dirt, paint oxidation, embedded clay and mud stains, rust, smoke, and algae. 2. Effective on brick, granite, sandstone, unpolished marble, and most other types of masonry surfaces. Do not use on limestone surfaces. 3. Type One Acceptable Products: a. Sure Klean Restoration Cleaner. b. Diedrich 101G Restoration Cleaner. c. Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Contact Information: 1. Diedrich Technologies, Oak Creek, WI www.diedrichtechnologies.com. 2. Sure Klean Products by ProSoCo Inc, Kansas City, KS www.prosoco.com. I; ,[rteX17111yI[IL 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Provide covered access to building for public, employees, and service vehicles at all times. 2. Protect, or avoid contact with, auto and pedestrian traffic. 3. Protect aluminum, wood, and painted surfaces from exposure to cleaning solution. Also protect plants and shrubbery. 4. Protect surrounding landscape and lawn areas from contact with cleaning solutions. a. Landscape and lawn areas may be best protected by keeping them as wet as possible through use of lawn soaker hoses which provide a slow but steady mist of water to areas adjacent to masonry being cleaned. b. Root systems of adjacent trees and shrubs exposed to cleaning rinse waters can be protected with use of neutralizing trenches. 5. Protect non -masonry surfaces that are not to be replaced from contact with cleaning solution. a. Protect wooden and painted surfaces with sheets of polyethylene or other proven protective materials, firmly fixed and sealed to surface. b. Keep non -masonry surfaces, which are not protected, running -wet with clean water throughout cleaning process of adjacent masonries. B. Surface Preparation: Unit Masonry Cleaning - 2 - 040131 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 1. Complete paint stripping and cleaning procedures before installation of new window glazing and paint finishes. Failure to do so will make it necessary to protect such finishes from contact with cleaning and paint stripping agents. 2. Test surfaces not to be cleaned for possible detrimental effects of cleaning solutions and protect as determined necessary by test results. 3. Temporarily calk or otherwise protect open joints to prevent intrusion of washing waters into wall structure or building interior. 3.2 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Any dilution of cleaning materials will be with clean water in accordance with instructions on Manufacturer's printed container label. 2. Surface Treatment: a. Thoroughly pre -wet surfaces, which are to be treated with water soluble materials, with clean water before application of cleaning materials. b. Purpose of pre -wetting is to limit activity of cleaning solution to masonry surface and prevent cleaning solutions from being too readily absorbed by dry masonries. Failure to adequately pre -wet may result in streaking and other residual staining of treated masonries. 3. Pressure Application: a. Use high pressure rinsing equipment for pre -wetting and rinsing procedures described below. Pressures of 400 to 800 psi and a flow rate of 4 to 6 gallons per minute have proved most effective. b. Use low-pressure spray application for cleaning materials. High pressure application may drive cleaning compounds deep into masonry surface making it impossible to rinse treated surfaces free of cleaning residues. c. If spray application of cleaning solution is desired, apply cleaning agents with 50 psi maximum spray equipment. d. Equipment that can apply hot water shall be controllable so water temperatures do not exceed 160 deg F. 4. Rinse chemicals after appropriate dwell time using garden hose just before rinsing with high- pressure equipment. 5. Avoid cleaning at times of extreme or excessive winds. Prewash: 1. Apply heavy coating of Prewash to masonry surface using synthetic fiber brush or roller. 2. Allow material to remain on surface until carbon stains are dissolved. Do not allow prewash to dry on surface. 3. Rinse treated surfaces thoroughly with fresh water, employing pressure equipment removing all cleaning compound, dirt, etc. 4. Apply a Restoration Cleaner to area treated using a natural fiber masonry washing brush or low pressure spray. 5. Allow solution to dwell on surface three to five minutes depending on drying conditions. Do not allow cleaning solution to dry in. I 6. Rinse treated surfaces thoroughly with fresh water employing pressure washing equipment - removing all cleaning compounds, dirt, stains, etc. C. Restoration Cleaner I: 1. Apply cleaning solution liberally to masonry surface using low-pressure spray or densely packed, soft fibered masonry washing brush. 2. Allow cleaning solution to remain on wall for 3 to 5 minutes depending upon drying conditions. Do not allow cleaning solution to dry in. 3. Reapply cleaning solution in a scrubbing manner. 4. Rinse treated surfaces thoroughly with fresh water employing pressure washing equipment removing all cleaning compounds, dirt, etc. 5. Reapply as necessary. 6. Allow solution to dwell on surface 3 to 5 minutes depending on drying conditions. Do not allow cleaning solution to dry in. Unit Masonry Cleaning - 3 - 040131 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 7. Rinse treated surfaces thoroughly with fresh water employing pressure washing equipment removing all cleaning compounds, dirt, stain, etc. 3.3 CLEANING i A. Remove and dispose of masking materials following completion of cleaning operation. Leave windows and non -masonry areas clean. B. Sweep or flush residue washed from building surface away from surrounding sidewalk and service areas nightly. Premises shall be clean and neat at all times. END OF SECTION Unit Masonry Cleaning - 4 - 040131 Project # 3885 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 6-25-2010 SECTION 04 0513 CEMENT AND LIME MASONRY MORTARING A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of masonry mortar used on Project. 1.2 REFERENCES Austin Welding Lab Design i A. American Society For Testing And Materials: 1. ASTM C 144-03, 'Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.' 2. ASTM C 150-04, 'Standard Specification for Portland Cement.' 3. ASTM C 207-01, 'Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.' A. Quality Assurance / Control: 1. If pre -mixed wet mortar or pre -blended dry mortar mix are to be used, provide certification from Manufacturer or Supplier verifying that mixes meet specification requirements. 2. If site mixed / blended mortar is to be used, provide written description of proposed method of measuring and mixing of materials. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Project Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Requirements: a. Cold weather, as referred to in this Section, is four hours with ambient temperature below 40 deg F in 24-hour period. Do not lay masonry in cold weather unless authorized by Architect. b. Heat mixing water and sand as required during cold weather to produce mortar temperatures at application of between 70 and 120 deg F. c. Heat masonry units to 40 deg F minimum when ambient temperature is below 20 deg F. d. Provide windbreaks during construction if ambient temperature is 35 deg F or below and wind velocities exceed 15 mph. e. If ambient temperature is 20 deg F or below, provide enclosure for masonry under construction with heat sources and maintain temperature in enclosure at 40 deg F minimum. f. Keep materials free of ice and snow. Do not lay masonry on frozen material. 2. Hot Weather Requirements: a. Hot weather, as referred to in this Section, is ambient air temperature above 100 deg F or ambient air temperature above 90 deg F with wind velocity 8 mph or greater. b. In hot weather, cool mixing water as necessary to maintain mortar and grout temperatures below 90 deg F. c. In hot weather, prevent rapid drying of walls by using fog spray or by covering wall with plastic or wet canvas or burlap. Cement And Lime Masonry Mortaring - 1 - 040513 Project # 3885 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design A. Portland Cement: Meet requirements of ASTM C 150, Type II Low Alkali unless approved otherwise in writing by Architect. B. Hydrated Lime: Meet requirements of ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Aggregate: 1. Standard Mortar: a. Natural or manufactured sand meeting requirements of ASTM C 144 and following: 1) Fineness modulus: 1.6 to 2.5 percent 2) Water demand, ratio by weight: 0.65 percent maximum 3) Grading: Sieve Natural Sand Percent Passing Manufactured Sand No. 4 100 100 No. 8 95 to 100 95 to 100 No. 16 70 to 100 70 to 100 No. 30 40 to 75 40 to 75 No. 50 10 to 35 20 to 40 No. 100 2 to 15 10 to 25 No. 200 none 0 to 10 D. Water: Clean and free of acids, alkalis, and organic materials. E. Admixtures: Use no admixtures, except for color pigments specified below, without Architect's written permission. Use of any admixture to meet cold weather requirements and admixtures that increase air entrainment are expressly forbidden under all circumstances. Mortar Color Pigment: 1. High purity, chemically inert, unfading, alkali -fast mineral oxides, finely ground and especially prepared for mortar. 2. Color Standard: To match existing. Verify with Owner. 3. Type One Acceptable Products: a. True Tone Mortar Colors by Davis Colors, Los Angeles, CA www.daviscolors.com. b. SGS Mortar Colors by Solomon Colors, Springfield, IL www.solomoncolors.com. c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 2.2 MIXES A. Unit Masonry Mortar: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: a. Type N: 750 psi. b. Type S: 1800 psi. 2. Parts by Volume: Type N S Portland Cement 1 1 Hydrated Lime 1 1/2 a. Damp Loose Sand: 2-1/4 minimum to three maximum, times sum of volumes of cement and lime used. Maintain sand piles in damp, loose condition. 3. Parts by Weight: Type N S Portland Cement 94 lbs 94 lbs Hydrated Lime 40 lbs 20 lbs Cement And Lime Masonry Mortaring - 2 - 040513 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design Dry Sand 360 lbs minimum to 480 lbs maximum. PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Cement And Lime Masonry Mortaring - 3 - 040513 Project# 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 04 0516 MASONRY GROUTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of masonry grout used on Project. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society For Testing And Materials: 1. ASTM C 94-03, 'Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete.' 2. ASTM C 150-04, 'Standard Specification for Portland Cement.' 3. ASTM C 207-01, 'Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 4. ASTM C 404-03, 'Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.' 5. ASTM C 1019-03, 'Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout.' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance/ Control: 1. If pre -blended dry grout is to be used, provide certification from Manufacturer or Supplier verifying that mixes meet specification requirements. 2. If grout is to be mixed in field, provide written description of proposed procedure for measuring and mixing of materials. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Project Environmental Requirements: Install grout under same environmental conditions as specified for mortar. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: Meet requirements of ASTM C 150. Use Type II Low Alkali in exterior walls or in walls subject to moisture, unless approved otherwise in writing by Architect. B. Hydrated Lime: Meet requirements of ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Aggregate: 1. Meet requirements of ASTM C 404, Table 1. a. Grading Requirements for Fine Ag iregate, Natural, Size 2. Sieve Percent Passing No. 4 100 No. 8 95-100 No. 16 60-100 No. 30 35-70 No. 50 16-35 Masonry Grouting - 1 - 040516 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 No. 100 12 - 15 b. Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate, Size 8. Sieve Percent Passing 1/2 Inch 100 3/8 Inch 85-100 No. 4 10-30 No.8 0-10 No. 16 0 - 5 D. Water: Clean and free of acids, alkalis, and organic materials. Austin Welding Lab Design E. Admixtures: No additives are allowed which will increase air entrainment. Other additives may be used as approved in writing by Architect before use. 2.2 MIXES A. Procedure: 1. Use of pre -blended dry grout mix is allowed only with submission of certification that material specification requirements have been complied with. 2. Use method of measuring and mixing materials that will ensure consistently proportioned grout batches throughout installation of masonry work. No measuring of materials by 'shovels full' is permitted for field mixed grout. 3. Batch, mix, and deliver transit -mixed grout in accordance with requirements of ASTM C 94. B. Proportions by Volume 1. Water: Enouah to aive creamv Dourino consistencv. usually slumn of between 8 and 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Use fine grout for cavities 2 inches and smaller in smallest dimension. Use coarse grout for cavities greater than 2 inches in smallest dimension. END OF SECTION Masonry Grouting - 2 - 040516 Material Fine Grout Coarse Grout Portland Cement One cu ft One cu ft Hydrated Lime (optional) 1/10 cu ft 1/10 cu ft Damp, Loose Sand 2-1/4 to 3 cu ft 2-1/4 to 3 cu ft Pea Gravel none 1 to 2 cu ft PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Use fine grout for cavities 2 inches and smaller in smallest dimension. Use coarse grout for cavities greater than 2 inches in smallest dimension. END OF SECTION Masonry Grouting - 2 - 040516 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 SECTION 04 2223 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Austin Welding Lab Design A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install architectural concrete unit masonry as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and install anchor bolts and embedded anchors as described in Contract Documents. 3. Grout door frames installed in CMU walls. B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Section 05 1223: Metal Lintels. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 0523: Quality of anchor bolts 2. Section 08 1213: Steel Door Frames. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society For Testing And Materials: 1. ASTM C 90-02, 'Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.' 2. ASTM C 331-04, 'Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units.' B. Canadian Standards Association 1. CAN 3 -A165.1 -M85, 'Concrete Masonry Units' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance I Control: Manufacturer's certification that units meet compressive strength specified requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Check, carefully unload, and deliver material to site in such a manner as to avoid soiling, damaging, or snipping. B. Store material on planks clear of ground and protect from damage, dirt, or disfigurement. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Mortar: Type 'S' mortar as specified in Section 04 0513. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Meet requirements of ASTM C 90, Type I, moisture control units, lightweight classification. Architectural Concrete Unit Masonry - 1 - 042223 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 2. Meet requirements of CSA A165.1, Type H/15/A/M and standards of 0.04 percent lineal shrinkage or less when tested in accordance with present Bureau of Standards method. i a. 85 lbs per cu ft minimum weight classification. i b. Lightweight aggregates conforming to ASTM C 331. 4 c. Do not use re -crushed masonry units as aggregate. 3. Outside Corners: Square -edged, except where bull nose is indicated on Drawings. 4. Use special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, etc, as required. 5. Uniform color and textures with unbroken edges. Smooth face, except where shown otherwise i on Drawings. v 2.3 ACCESSORIES I I A. Construction Cleaning Compounds: I 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. 202 or 202V by Diedrich Technologies, Oak Creek, WI www.diedrichtechnologies.com. ` b. Surekleen No. 600 or Vana-Trol by ProSoCo Inc, Kansas City, KS www.prosoco.com. c. Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 016200. I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Site Tolerances: 1. Masonry work shall be true to vertical and horizontal planes within 1/8 inch in 10 feet, non- cumulative. 2. Maintain 3/8 inch mortarjoints throughout. B. General: 1. Make cuts proper size to accommodate work of other trades. Cut openings for electrical devices using cover plates no larger than can be covered by standard size plate. Replace unit masonry in which larger than necessary openings are cut. Do not patch openings with mortar or other material. 2. Step back unfinished work for joining with new work. Use toothing only with Architect's approval. C. Laying: 1. Layout: a. Running bond except where indicated otherwise. Select brick so there is uniform distribution of hues. b. Use solid brick where brick coursing would otherwise show cores. 2. Joints: a. Tool concave, except where flush joints are required for resinous wall coating. Fill completely except where indicated differently. b. Do not tool until mortar has taken initial set. c. Point holes in joints. Fill and tool properly. 3. Concrete Masonry Units: a. Lay hollow masonry units dry. Do not lay masonry on frozen material. b. Align cells or cavities to preserve an unobstructed cavity for grouting. c. Full bedding required on both webs and face shell under first course. Other courses need only face shell bedding except where bedding is needed to control the flow of grout. d. Do not allow excess mortar to block cells receiving grout or foamed -in-place insulation. D. Grouting: 1. Fully grout cells containing reinforcing bars. a. Place grout in 48 inch maximum lifts. Architectural Concrete Unit Masonry - 2 - 042223 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design b. Consolidate grout by means of a mechanical vibrator. Do not use cell reinforcing to rod grout. c. Before loss of plasticity, mechanically reconsolidate grout. 2. CMU Cells. a. Place grout in 48 inch maximum lifts. b. Consolidate grout by means of a mechanical vibrator. Do not use cell reinforcing to rod grout. c. Before loss of plasticity, mechanically reconsolidate grout. 3. Grout hollow metal door frames solid. 4. Provide grout*leveling bed for support of wall plates. E. Foamed Insulation: Install in ungrouted cells in exterior walls. 3.2 CLEANING A. After mortar has hardened, wet masonry and clean with specified cleaning compound. Use stiff fibered brush for application. Rinse masonry surfaces with water immediately after cleaning. Leave masonry clean, free of mortar daubs, and with tight mortarjoints. B. Remove and replace defective material at Architect's direction and at no additional cost to Owner. C. Clean up masonry debris and remove from site. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Brace masonry walls until walls attain adequate strength and are tied into building structure. Do not allow structural loading of masonry walls until walls attain adequate strength. END OF SECTION Architectural Concrete Unit Masonry - 3 - 042223 DIVISION 05: METALS 050000 METALS 050503 SHOP -APPLIED METAL COATINGS 050523 METAL FASTENINGS 051000 STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 051223 STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 1 - 050000 rXti Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 05 0503 SHOP -APPLIED METAL COATINGS I9_1[4ffilil :IM-AIII 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of factory or shop -applied priming applied to steel supplied to Project without finish coat. 2. Quality of and procedures for field touch-up and repair of factory -applied priming and galvanizing. Related Sections 1. Sections under 09 9000 heading: Finish Painting. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society For Testing And Materials: 1. ASTM A 780-01, 'Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot -Dip Galvanized Coatings.' 2. ASTM B 695-00, 'Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel.' PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Factory And Shop -Applied Primer: Compatible with and of equal or better quality than finish paint system to be applied by Sections under 09 9000 heading. Primer on unexposed, unfinished surfaces may be fabricator's standard shop coat. B. Repairs To Primed Surface: Unless otherwise specified, use primer which matches characteristics of original primer and is compatible with and of equal or better quality than finish paint system to be applied by Sections under 09 9000 heading. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Clean, grind, or otherwise prepare welds in steel that is to be coated within limits acceptable to welder responsible for structural integrity. 2. Surfaces to be coated shall be clean, dry and free of oil, grease, and corrosion products. B. Preparation Of Primed, Ungalvanized Surfaces: Clean welds and grind serious abrasions. 3.2 REPAIR/ RESTORATION A. Repairs To Primed, Ungalvanized Surfaces: 1. Thoroughly clean metal and give one prime coat of specified material, well -worked into metal joints and open spaces. Match existing primed finish as required. Shop -Applied Metal Coatings - 1 - 050503 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design a. Do not apply primer at temperatures below 45 deg F. b. Protect un -primed machine -finished surfaces against corrosion by priming. 2. All Items: a. Apply repair materials immediately after surface preparation is complete. b. Take thickness measurements, with either magnetic or electromagnetic gauge, to ensure applied coating is as specified or agreed to. END OF SECTION Shop -Applied Metal Coatings - 2 - 050503 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 05 0523 METAL FASTENING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of structural bolts used on Project. 2. Requirements and standards for site welded metal -to -metal connections. Related Sections: 1. Furnishing and installing of structural bolts specified under Section concerned. 2. Performance of welding specified under Section concerned. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society For Testing And Materials: 1. ASTM A 36-03a, 'Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.' 2. ASTM A 108-99, 'Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality. 3. ASTM A 307-03, 'Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 psi Tensile Strength.' 4. ASTM A 325-02, 'Standard Specification for High -Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.' 5. ASTM A 496-02, 'Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement.' B. American Welding Society / American National Standards Institute: 1. AWS / ANSI 131.1-2003, 'Structural Welding Code - Steel.' 2. AWS / ANSI D1.3-1998, 'Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Welders shall be certified 30 days minimum before beginning work on Project. If there is doubt as to proficiency of welder, Architect may require welder to take another test, at no expense to Owner. Certification shall be by Pittsburgh Laboratories or other authority approved by Architect. B. Certifications: Maintain welder's certifications on job -site. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Bolts And Threaded Fasteners: 1. Bolts: See structural. a. Steel to Steel Connections: Conform to requirements of ASTM A 325. b. Anchor Bolts: Non -headed type threaded 2 inches minimum conforming to requirements of ASTM A 307, Grade A. Anchor hook to project 2 inches minimum including bolt diameter. c. All Other Bolts: Conform to requirements of ASTM A 307, Grade A. B. Arc -Welding Electrodes: Type E70XX AWS Iron and Steel Arc -welding electrodes and meeting current AISC Specifications. Metal Fastening 1 _ 050523 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Welding shall meet requirements of ANSI / AWS D1.1 and D1.3. B. Connections noted as SC, slip critical, shall have load indicating washers and faying surfaces free of shop coating, grease, oil, and other deleterious materials. C. Installation of bolts shall meet AISC requirements. END OF SECTION Metal Fastening - 2 - 050523 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 SECTION 051223 STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Miscellaneous structural steel. Austin Welding Lab Design B. Related Sections: 1. Sections under 04 2000 heading: Installation of lintels, channel frames, and miscellaneous structural steel. 2. Section 05 0503: Quality of priming. 3. Section 05 0523: Quality of welding. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society For Testing And Materials: 1. ASTM A 36-03a, 'Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.' 2. ASTM A 53-02, 'Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless.' 3. ASTM A 500-03, 'Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.' PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Miscellaneous Structural Steel: Meet requirements of ASTM A 36. B. Shop Primer: 1. Concealed Steel: Fabricator's standard shop coat. 2. Exposed Steel To Receive Finish: Primer shall be acceptable to Finish Manufacturer, 2.2 FABRICATION A. After fabrication and before shop priming, hot -dip or mechanically galvanize lintels to be installed in exterior walls, bollards, satellite dish base, and channel frames. B. Shop prime steel provided under this Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Structural Steel for Buildings - 1 - 051223 - ; P DIVISION 06: WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 060000 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 060573 FIRE -RETARDANT WOOD TREATMENT 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061636 WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY 062024 DOOR,FRAME, AND FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 1 - 060000 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 06 0573 FIRE -RETARDANT WOOD TREATMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To 1. Quality of treated wood provided under Division 06. B. Related Sections: 1. Sections Under 06 1000 and 06 2000 Headings: Furnishing of treated wood. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Wood -Preserver's Association: 1. AWPA Cl-96,'All Timber Products, Pressure Treatment.' 2. AWPA C2-96,'Lumber, Timbers, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties, Pressure Treatment.' 3. AWPA C9-96, 'Plywood, Pressure Treatment.' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance / Control: Certificate of pressure treatment showing compliance with specification requirements. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Kiln dry wood after treatment. 2. Quality Standard: FLAME PROOF LHC method by Osmose or equal method meeting UL FR -S classification. 3. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Osmose Inc, Griffin, GA www.osmose.com. b. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Treat lumber and plywood for new work in accordance with AWPA Standards and dried after treatment. B. Lumber grade and species shall be as specified for particular use. C. Identify treated lumber as to name of treater, preservative used, and retention in lbs/cu ft. D. Season after treatment to moisture content required for non -treated material. Fire -Retardant Wood Treatment - 1 - 060573 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design END OF SECTION Fire -Retardant Wood Treatment - 2 - 060573 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 061636 WOOD PANEL PRODUCT SHEATHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install wood panel product sheathing required for walls as described in Contract Documents. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect sheathing and keep under cover in transit and at job site. B. Do not deliver material unduly long before it is required. C. Store sheathing on level racks and keep free of ground. Stack to insure proper ventilation and drainage. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Sheathing: 1. Meet requirements of PS 1-95, PS 2-92, PRP -108 (APA), or PRP -133 (TECO). Except where plywood is specifically indicated on Drawings, oriented strand board (OSB) is acceptable. 2. Every sheet of sheathing shall be stamped as follows: a. Appropriate APA, TECO, or PFS grade stamp identifying thickness and span rating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUPPLIERS A. Category One VMR Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1. BMC, Orem, UT. www.bmcwest.com. Contact Par Palmer: a. Mobile: (801) 376-9853. b. Home: (801) 785-0278. c. Office: (801) 224-0541. d. FAX: e. E -Mail: Palmer@bmcwest.com 2. Burton Lumber, Salt Lake City, UT. www.burtonlumber.com. Contact Jeff Burton: a. Mobile: (801573-5940. b. Office: (801) 952-3700. c. FAX: d. E -Mail: 3. J. M. Thomas Forest Products, Ogden, UT. www.thomasforest.com. Contact Tom Karren: a. Office: (800) 962-8780. b. FAX: c. E -Mail: 4. Stock Building Supply, Roy, UT. www.stockbuildingsupply.com. Contact Craig Rees: Wood Panel Product Sheathing - 1 - 061636 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design _ a. Mobile: (801) 301-0326. b. Office: (801)436-2203. c. FAX: d. E -Mail: 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Top of fastener heads shall be flush with sheathing surface. B. Wall Sheathing: 1. Spacing: Provide 1/8 inch space between sheets at end and edge joints. 2. Edge Bearing And Blocking: a. Panel edges shall bear on framing members and butt along their center lines. b. Back block panel edges, which do not bear on framing members, with 2 inch nominal framing. 3. Fastening: Place fasteners not less than 3/8 inch in from edge, 12 inches on center along intermediate supports, and 4 inches on center along panel edge and into studs connected to hold-down anchors, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 4. Size: a. 15/32 inch actual minimum thickness. b. Do not install any piece of wall sheathing with shortest dimension of less than 12 inches. END OF SECTION Wood Panel Product Sheathing - 2 - 061636 Project # 3885 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 6-25-2010 SECTION 06 2024 Austin Welding Lab Design DOOR, FRAME, AND FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install sealants for calking door frames as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and install insulation in doorframes as described in Contract Documents. B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Flush wood doors. 2. Hollow metal door frames. 3. Finish hardware. C. Related Sections: 1. Sections under 04 2000 heading: Grouting of frames installed in masonry walls. 2. Section 07 9213: Quality of sealants. 3. Sections under 08 1000 heading: Furnishing of doors and metal frames. 4. Sections under 08 7000 heading: Furnishing of finish hardware. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance I Control: 1. Inspection report verifying correct operation and adjustment of installed hardware. 2. Copy of'Installation Guide for Doors & Hardware' by Door & Hardware Institute. Guide may be obtained from Door and Hardware Institute (DHI). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Schedule conference after hardware has been delivered to site and organized into hardware groups by door, but prior to installation of hardware. 2. Check for appropriate blocking and for correct hardware models and fasteners for substrates. 3. Review set of Manufacturer's installation, adjustment, and maintenance instructions submitted under Section 08 7101. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Wood Doors: 1. Do not have doors delivered to building site until after plaster, cement, and taping compound are dry. If doors are to be stored at job -site for more than one week, seal top and bottom edges if not factory sealed. 2. Store flat on a level surface in a dry, well ventilated building. Cover to keep clean but allow air circulation. 3. Handle with clean gloves and do not drag doors across one another or across other surfaces. 4. Do not subject doors to abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity or sudden changes therein. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity of locality before hanging. Door, Frame, And Finish Hardware Installation - 1 - 062024 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hollow Metal Frames: 1. Site Tolerances: a. Squareness: 1/16 inch from top edge to opposite top edge. b. Plumbness: 1/16 inch from top of jamb to bottom of jamb. c. Alignment: 1/16 inch from plane of left side face of jamb to right side face of jamb. d. Twist: 1/16 inch across throat of jamb plane measured across each face to plane of opposite jamb throat. e. Finished Clearance Between Door And Frame: 1) 1/16 inch at head and hinge jamb plus 1/16 inch maximum 2) 1/8 inch at strike jamb plus or minus 1/16 inch maximum. 3) 1/2 inch to top of finished floor surface or 1/4 inch to top of threshold, plus or minus 1/16 inch maximum. 2. Set frame in location and level head. 3. Equalize with adjustable floor anchor. 4. Set spreaders and fasten jambs to floor and wall. a. Wood spreaders shall be square, fabricated from lumber one inch minimum thick, be same length as door opening at header, and same depth as frame. b. Cut notches for frame stops. c. Do not remove spreaders until frames are permanently anchored in wall. d. Use one spreader at base of frame and another at strike level. e. Do not use temporary spreaders welded to base of jambs during installation of frame. 5. Fill gap between frame and framing with urethane foam or tightly -packed fiberglass insulation. If urethane foam is used, coat interior of frames with foam before installing frame. Trim excess before installation of frame. 6. Calking: a. Calk around both sides of frames of doors receiving acoustical seals with specified sealant. b. Calk around both sides of frames installed in exposed masonry walls with specified sealant. B. Doors: 1. When Project is completed, doors shall not bind, stick, or be mounted so as to cause future hardware difficulties. 2. Do not impair utility or structural strength of door in fitting of door, applying hardware, or cutting and altering door louvers, panels, or other special details. C. Hardware: 1. General: a. Install using set of Manufacturer's installation, adjustment, and maintenance instructions submitted with hardware under Section 08 7101. Follow as closely as possible. b. Mount closers on jamb stop side of door in parallel arm configuration where it is physically possible to do so and not damage or hinder operation of door or closer. 2. Hardware for Wood Doors: a. If doors are not factory -machined, use hardware templates furnished by Hardware Manufacturer when mounting hardware. b. Set hinges flush with edge surface. Be sure that hinges are set in a straight fine to prevent distortion. c. Mount door latches high in strike plate opening so when door later settles, latch will not bind. Door, Frame, And Finish Hardware Installation - 2 - 062024 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: Arrange to have keys brought to Project site and, in meeting attended by local representatives and Architect, test every new key and locking mechanism. END OF SECTION Door, Frame, And Finish Hardware Installation - 3 - 062024 del'' �3 DIVISION 07: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 079000 JOINT PROTECTION 079213 ELASTOMERICJOINT SEALANTS END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 1 - 070000 ISjY i Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 07 9213 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install sealants not specified to be furnished and installed under other Sections. 2. Quality of sealants to be used on Project not specified elsewhere, including submittal, material, and installation requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's literature and installation recommendations for each Product. 2. Schedule showing joints requiring sealants. Show also backing and primer to be used. Quality Assurance / Control: Certificate from Manufacturer indicating date of manufacture. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle to prevent inclusion of foreign matter, damage by water, or breakage. B. Deliver and keep in original containers until ready for use. C. Do not use damaged or deteriorated materials. D. Store in a cool place, but never under 40 deg F. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Sealants: 1. Sealants provided shall meet Manufacturer's shelf -life requirements. 2. Exterior Building Elements: a. Aluminum entrance perimeters and thresholds. b. Door frames. c. Connections. d. Other joints necessary to seal off building from outside air and moisture. e. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Dow Corning: a) Primer: 1200. b) Sealant: 791. 2) GE Sealants & Adhesives: a) Primer: SS4044. b) Sealant: Silpruf SCS 2000. 3) Tremco: a) Primer: (1) Metal: No. 20. (2) Other: No. 23. Elastomeric Joint Sealants - 1 - 079213 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design b) Sealant: Spectrum 1. 3. Exterior Concrete: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Joints between building foundations and exterior site concrete: a) Dow Corning: i (1) Primer: 1200. (2) Sealant: 790. b) GE Sealants & Adhesives: (1) Primer: SS4044. (2) Sealant: Silpruf SCS 2000. 2) Expansion joints in Portland cement concrete driveways and parking lots: a) Dow Corning: 888 (NS). 890 (SL) may be used on non -sloping areas. 4. Interior: a. Inside jambs and heads of exterior door frames. b. Miscellaneous gaps between substrates. c. Category Four Approved Product. See Section 016200 for definitions of Categories. 1) Tub, Tile, And Ceramic Silicone Sealant by Dow Corning. 2) Acrylseal by GE Sealants & Adhesives. d. Latisil Sealant by Laticrete. e. Pro -Select Kitchen And Bath Silicone Sealant by Sherwin Williams. 1) Tremsil 200 by Tremco. 5. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors. Backing: Flexible closed cell, non -gassing polyurethane or polyolefin rod or bond breaker tape as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer for joints being sealed. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Contact Information: 1. Dow Corning Corp, Midland, MI www.dowcorning.com. 2. Laticrete International Inc, Bethany, CT www.laticrete.com. 3. GE Sealants & Adhesives, Huntersville, NC www.gesealants.com. 4. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ www.sikaconstruction.com . 5. Sherwin-Williams, Cleveland, OH www.sherwin-williams.com. 6. Tremco, Cleveland, OH www.tremcosealants.com. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove existing sealants where specified. Surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free of dust, oil, grease, dew, or frost. B. Apply primer, if required. C. Joint Backing: 1. Rod for open joints shall be at least 1-1/2 times width of open joint and of thickness to give solid backing. Backing shall fill up joint so depth of sealant bite is no more than 3/8 inch deep. 2. Apply bond -breaker tape in shallow joints as recommended by Sealant Manufacturer. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Apply sealant with hand -calking gun with nozzle of proper size to fit joints. Use sufficient pressure to insure full contact to both sides of joint to full depth of joint. Apply sealants in vertical joints from bottom to top. Elastomeric Joint Sealants - 2 - 079213 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design B. Tool joints immediately after application of sealant if required to achieve full bedding to substrate or to achieve smooth sealant surface. Tool joints in opposite direction from application direction, i.e., in vertical joints, from the top down. Do not 'wet tool' sealants. C. Depth of sealant bite shall be 1/4 inch minimum and 1/2 inch maximum, but never more than one half or less than one fourth joint width. D. Do not apply calking at temperatures below 40 deg F. E. Calk gaps between painted or coated substrates and unfinished or pre -finished substrates. Calk gaps larger than 3/16 inch between painted or coated substrates. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent materials, which have been soiled, immediately (before setting) as recommended by Manufacturer. END OF SECTION Elastomeric Joint Sealants - 3 - 079213 DIVISION 08: OPENINGS 081000 DOORS AND FRAMES 081213 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 081429 PRE -FINISHED FLUSH WOOD DOORS/CLEAR 087000 HARDWARE 087100 FINISH HARDWARE 087101 COMMON FINISH HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS 087102 HANGING DEVICES 087103 SECURING DEVICES 087105 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS 087106 CLOSING DEVICES 087107 PROTECTIVE PLATES AND TRIM 087108 STOPS AND HOLDERS 087109 ACCESSORIES 088000 GLAZING 088100 GLASSGLAZING END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 1 - 080000 y,,u r. Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 081213 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Hollow metal frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 1223: Channel frames. 2. Section 06 2024: Installation. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Steel Door Institute / American National Standards Institute: 1. SDI / ANSI A250.11-2002, 'Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance / Control: Copy of SDI / ANSI A250.11. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Frames: 1. Cold rolled furniture steel. a. Interior Frames: 16 ga.. b. Exterior Frames: 14 ga.. 2. Provide labeled frame to match fire rating of door. 3. Finish: a. Use one of following systems: 1) Prime surfaces with rust inhibiting primer. 2) Galvanize. 4. Anchors: 16 US ga minimum meeting UL or other code acceptable requirements for door rating involved. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Category One Approved Manufacturers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1. Any current member of Steel Door Institute. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General Requirements: 1. Frames shall be welded units. Provide temporary spreader on each welded frame. 2. Provide Manufacturer's gauge label for each item. 3. Make breaks, arrises, and angles uniform, straight, and true. Accurately fit corners. Hollow Metal Frames - 1 - 081213 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design B. Provide mortar guards at strikes and hinges. C. Anchors: 1. Provide three jamb anchors minimum for each jamb. On hinge side, install one anchor at each hinge location. On strike side, install one anchor at strike level and anchors at same level as top and bottom hinges. Tack weld anchors on frames intended for installation in framed walls. 2. Frames installed before walls are constructed shall be provided with extended base anchors in addition to other specified anchors. 3. Anchor types and configurations shall meet wall conditions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUPPLIERS A. Category One VMR Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1. Architectural Building Supply, Salt Lake City, UT Russ Farley, Phone (800) 574-4369 FAX 801-484-6817, e-mail russf@absdoors.com. 2. Beacon Metals Inc, Salt Lake City, UT Jared Butler, Phone (888) 823-2206, FAX 801-485-764, e-mail jared@beacon-metals.com. END OF SECTION Hollow Metal Frames - 2 - 081213 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 081429 FLUSH WOOD DOORS: Factory -Finished, Clear PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Factory -finished flush wood doors, including under -Platform doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 2024: Installation. REFERENCES A. Architectural Woodwork Institute: 1. AWI Standards, 'Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, 7th Edition.' B. Composite Panel Association / American National Standards Institute: 1. CPA /ANSI A208.1-1999, 'Particleboard, Mat -Formed Wood.' C. Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association / American National Standards Institute: 1. HPVA/ANSI HP -1-2004, 'Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.' D. National Fire Protection Association /American National Standards Institute: 1. NFPA / ANSI 80-1998, 'Fire Doors and Fire Windows.' SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's product literature on doors and factory finish. 2. Maintenance and repair instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Schedule showing type of door at each location. Included shall be size, veneer, core type, fire rating, hardware prep, openings, blocking, etc. 2. Indicate factory finish color and type. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver in clean truck and, in wet weather, under cover. 1. Deliver to building site only after plaster, cement, and taping compound are completed and dry and after interior painting operations have been completed. 2. Individually wrap in polyethylene bags for shipment and storage. Leave shipping bag on door after installation until immediately before substantial completion inspection. B. Store doors in a space having controlled temperature and humidity range between 25 and 55 percent. Store flat on level surface in dry, well ventilated space. Cover to keep clean but allow air circulation. Do not subject doors to direct sunlight, abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity. C. Handle with clean gloves and do not drag doors across one another or across other surfaces. Flush Wood Doors: Factory -Finished, Clear - 1 - 081429 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard full door warranty for lifetime of original installation. 1. Warranty shall include finishing, hanging, and installing hardware if manufacturing defect was discovered after door was finished and installed. 2. Warranty to include defects in materials including following: a. Delaminating in any degree. b. Warp or twist of 1/4 inch or more in door panel at time of one-year warranty inspection. c. Telegraphing of core assembly: Variation of 1/100 inch or more in 3 inch span. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Wood Doors: 1. Type: AWI PC-5ME or FD-5ME. 2. Grade: AWI Premium, except face veneer. 3. Fully Type I Construction: Adhere all glue lines with Type I adhesive, including veneer lay-up. 4. Face Veneer: a. Plain sliced Red Oak meeting requirements of AWI Grade A, 1/50 inchthick minimum immediately before finishing. b. Face veneers shall be running book matched. 5. Core: a. Fully bonded to stiles and rails and sanded as a unit before applying veneers. b. Non -Rated: 1) 32 Ib density meeting requirements of ANSI A 208.1 Mat Formed Wood Particle Board, Grade 1-L-1 minimum. 2) Stiles: a) 1-3/8 inches deep minimum before fitting. b) Stile face to be hardwood matching face veneer material, thickness manufacturer's standard. 3) Rails: a) 1-1/8 inches. b) Manufacturer's option. 6. Factory Glazing: a. Glazing: Tempered glazing meeting requirements of ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class I, Quality q3. Thickness 1/4 inch b. Lite Kit: 1) Pre -finished wood or wood veneer frames. 2) Approved Products: a) Profile W6 by Marshfield. b) Profile VTI by VT Industries. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 016200 for definitions of Categories. 1. Oshkosh Architectural Door, Oshkosh, WI. 2. VT Industries, Holstein, IA. 3. Marshfield Door Systems Inc, Marshfield, WI. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Doors shall be factory -machined. Coordinate with Section 08 1213 and Sections under 08 7000. Flush Wood Doors: Factory -Finished, Clear - 2 - 081429 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design B. Provide doors requiring lites with factory- or shop -installed lites and stops to match fire rating of door. 2.4 FINISHES A. Factory Finishing: 1. Applied by Door Manufacturer before leaving factory. 2. Color: a. Match existing woodwork. 3. Finish: AWI Finish System TR -6 Catalyzed Polyurethane Premium Grade for unfilled, open -grain woods. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: 1. Doors shall have following information permanently affixed on top of door: a. Manufacturer: b. Door designation or model. c. Veneer species. d. Factory finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUPPLIERS A. Category One VMR Suppliers. See Section 016200 for definitions of Categories. 1. Architectural Building Supply, Salt Lake City, UT Russ Farley Phone (800) 574-4369 FAX 801- 484-6817 e-mail russf@absdoors.com. 2. Beacon Metals Inc, Salt Lake City, UT Jared Butler, Phone (888) 823-2206, FAX 801-485-764, e-mail jared@beacon-metals.com END OF SECTION Flush Wood Doors: Factory -Finished, Clear - 3 - 081429 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 08 7100 DOORHARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Other doors to the extent indicated. 2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. B. Related Sections include the following: Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for astragals and integral intumescent seals provided as part of fire -rated labeled assemblies. C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section. 1. Thresholds, weather stripping, and cylinders for locks specified in other Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type, in specified finish, full size. Tag with full description for coordination with the door hardware sets. Submit Samples before, or concurrent with, submission of the final door hardware sets, if requested. 1. Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements. C. Qualification Data: For Installer. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for locks, latches, and closers as requested. E. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule. F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. Door Hardware - 1 - 087100 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design G. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. 2. Content: Include the following information: a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and frame. b. Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item. C. Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer. d. Fastenings and other pertinent information. e. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. g. Mounting locations for door hardware. h. Door and frame sizes and materials. i. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of f operation, and interface with other building control systems. 1) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to enter; authorized person wants to exit, unauthorized person wants to enter; unauthorized person wants to exit. j. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. 3. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible date, particularly i where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets. p H. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer. 1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with I Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity. 3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 4. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. i B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. i C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Door Hardware - 2 - 087100 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design D. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." In addition to Owner, Construction Manager, Contractor, and Architect, conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's Security Consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 3. Requirements for key control system. 4. Address for delivery of keys. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to Owner's Representative by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Coordinate with aluminum entrance door supplier for door hardware installation. D. Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide for proper operation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows: Door Hardware - 3 - 087100 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design a. Exit Devices: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six (6) months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original products. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Products: a. Finish: Shall be US26D, unless otherwise noted. b. Manufacture Standard: 1) Butts: Hager, McKinney, Stanley, Ives* 2) Locksets: Schlage* No substitute 3) Closers: LCN* No substitute 4) Exit Devices: Von Duprin* No substitute 5) Trim: BBW, Rockwood, Hager, Ives* 6) Weatherstrip: Pemko, Hager, National Guard* 7) Continuous Hinges: HagerRoton, Markar, Ives* B. Substitution requests will be made in accordance with Division 01 requirements. 2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements. 2. ANSI/BHMA designations used elsewhere in this Section or in schedules to describe hardware items or to define quality or function are derived from the following standards. Provide products complying with these standards and requirements specified elsewhere in this Section. a. Butts and Hinges: ANSI A156.1. b. Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.2. C. Exit Devices: ANSI A156.3. Door Hardware - 4 - 087100 Project # 3885 2.3 2.4 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design d. Door Controls - Closers: ANSI A156.4. 180 degree swing only! e. Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products: ANSI/BHMA A156.5. f. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI A156.6. g. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI A156.7. h. Door Controls - Overhead Holders: ANSI A156.8. i. Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSI A156.13. j. Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI At 56.15. k. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI Al 56.16. I. Self -Closing Hinges and Pivots: ANSI A156.17. M. Materials and Finishes: ANSI Al 56.18. MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. B. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. C. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish. D. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. I'2 a C. a HINGES, GENERAL Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. 2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template -produced units. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Entrance Doors: Heavy -weight hinges. 2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges. 3. Interior Doors: Standard -weight hinges. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel with stainless-steel pin. 2. Interior Hinges: Steel with steel pin. 3. Hinges for Fire -Rated Assemblies: Steel with steel pin. Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings: Door Hardware - 5 - 087100 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 1. Safety Stud: Designed for stud in one leaf to engage hole in opposing leaf. 2. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging doors. 3. Corners: Square. F. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded -to -the -Head Wood Screws: For fire -rated wood doors. 2.5 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Hinges shall be a geared continuous hinge utilizing a single gear section for the door leaf and a separate gear section for the frame side of the door. The door leaf and jamb leaf shall fully mortised where scheduled, and full surface where scheduled.. Geared hinges are to be certified to ANSI 156.25, Grade 2 and UL 10C tested and approved for 90 minutes. 2.6 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated. B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8 -inch (16 -mm) minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. C. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm-) diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12 -inch- (300 -mm-) long rod for doors up to 84 inches (2100 mm) in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 84 inches (2100 mm) in height. 2.7 KEYING REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish temporary keyed cores for the construction period, and remove these when directed. The construction cores remain property of the supplier and shall be returned to the supplier when they are removed. Contractor shall install the permanent cores in the presence of the owner's representative. B. Owner will install permanent cores and provide keying. 2.8 PUSH/PULL UNITS A. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation, thru-bolted. 2.9 CLOSERS A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural Transportations Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements: a. Interior, Non -fire -rated Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf applied perpendicular to door. b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Door Hardware - 6 - 087100 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more than 30 Ibf to set door in motion and not more than 151bf to open door to minimum required width. C. Cylinder: Shall be of high strength cast iron construction. All door exterior closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles for all exterior door closers must be provided. Cylinder shall have been manufactured and in the marketplace for a minimum of 10 years D. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. E. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4 Grade 1. Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and cast iron body. Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome silicon steel spring. 2. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date -of -manufacture code. 3. Independent lab -tested 10,000,000 cycles. 4. Thru-bolts at wood doors unless doors are provided with closer blocking. Non -sized, non - handed, and adjustable. Place closer inside building, stairs, and rooms. 5. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware. 6. Opening pressure: Exterior doors 8.5 Ib., interior doors 5 Ib., labeled fire doors 15 Ib. 7. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck, fourth valve for delayed action where scheduled. 8. Extra -duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units. 9. Exterior doors do not require seasonal adjustments in temperatures from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F, furnish data on request. 10. Non -flaming fluid will not fuel door or floor covering fires. 11. Pressure relief values are not allowed. 2.10 EXIT DEVICES/PANIC HARDWARE A. General features: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. B. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural Transportations Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf. C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not require more than 151bf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool of special knowledge for operation. D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to AHJ for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. 1. Independent lab -tested 10,000,000 cycles. I Door Hardware - 7 - 087100 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 2. Push -through touch pad design. No exposed touch bar fasteners, no exposed cavities when operated. Return stroke fluid dampeners and rubber bottoming dampeners, plus anti -rattle devices. 3. No exposed screws to show through glass doors. 4. Non -handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions, no extra parts required to effect change of function. E. Specific features: 1. Non -Fire Rated Devices: As scheduled in hardware sets. 2. Lever Trim: Vandal resistant, forged brass or bronze escutcheon min .130" thickness, match lockset lever design. 3. Fire -Labeled Devices: UL label indicating "Fire Exit Hardware'. Vertical rod devices less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise scheduled. 4. Electrically Operated Devices: Single manufacturer source for electric latch retraction devices, electrically controlled trim, power transfers, power supplies, monitoring switches and controls. 5. Furnish all exit devices with deadlocking latchbolts. 6. End caps shall be sloped and of heavy-duty metal alloy construction and provide horizontal adjustment to provide flush alignment with device cover plate. When device end cap is installed, no raised edges will protrude. End cap shall be cast metal or forged aluminum and have a minimum thickness of (.250"). Plastic or metal stamping will not be acceptable. 7. Provide all shim kits and filler plates to allow flush mounting of exit devices on all types of doors used in this project. 8. Removable Mullions: Removable with single turn of building key. Securely reinstalled without need for key. 2.11 TRIM AND STOPS A. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates, shall be .050 gauge with 32D finish. Kick plates to be 10" high, mop plates to be 5" high. All plates shall be two (2) inches less full width of door. B. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls, and miscellaneous door trim shall be shown in the hardware schedule. C. Doorstops shall be furnished for all doors to prevent damage to doors or hardware from striking adjacent walls or fixtures. Wall stops are preferred. Floor stops are used only where noted in hardware schedule. Where conditions prohibit the use wall type stops, furnish overhead stops either surface mounted or concealed as noted in hardware sets. 2.12 A. 2.13 A. 2.14 A. WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. THRESHOLDS General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile as shown or scheduled. HARDWARE FINISHES Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and locksets (or push- pull units if no latch or lock sets). Door Hardware - 8 - 087100 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's sample. C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. D. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSIIBHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI Al 15-W Series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated, as follows, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as Door Hardware - 9 - 087100 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 3. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SETS HW SET: 01 DOOR NUMBER: 157 EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HINGE FBB179 4.5 X 4.5 652 STA 1 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB358 (BOTTOM) 626 IVE 1 EA AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB41T 630 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70TD RHO X 20-740 IC 626 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 EDA TB 689 LCN 2 EA WALL STOP WS401CCV 626 IVE 2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE END OF SECTION Door Hardware - 10- 087100 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 08 7101 COMMON FINISH HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL fi�ili•YIL4h4/e1:�7 A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. General requirements for finish hardware related to architectural wood and hollow metal doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 2024: Installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's cut sheets. 2. Two copies of Manufacturer's installation, adjustment, and maintenance instructions for each piece of hardware. Include one set in Operations And Maintenance Manual and send one set with hardware when delivered. 3. Copy of hardware schedule. 4. Written copy of keying system explanation. B. Shop Drawings: Submit hardware schedule indicating hardware to be supplied. Schedule shall indicate details such as proper type of strikeplates, spindle lengths, hand, backset, and bevel of locks, hand and degree opening of closer, length of kickplates, length of rods and flushbolts, type of door stop, and other necessary information necessary to determine exact hardware requirements. C. Closeout: Submit keying plan and bitting schedule as record documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Suppliers bidding this work shall have two years minimum experience in providing, detailing, scheduling, and installing builders hardware and shall employ at least one full time DHI Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Neatly and securely package hardware items by hardware group and identify for individual door with specified group number and set number used on Supplier's hardware schedule. Include fasteners and accessories necessary for installation and operation of finish hardware in same package. 1.5 SCHEDULING A. Hardware Templates: 1. Provide hardware templates to Sections 08 1213 and 08 1429 within 14 days after Architect approves hardware schedule. 2. Supply necessary hardware installation templates to Section 06 2024 before pre -installation conference. Common Finish Hardware Requirements 1 - 087101 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FASTENERS A. Fasteners shall be of suitable types, sizes and quantities to properly secure hardware. Fasteners shall be of same material and finish as hardware unless otherwise specified. Fasteners exposed to weather shall be non-ferrous or corrosion resisting steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUPPLIERS A. Category One Approved VMR Suppliers. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1. Architectural Building Supply, Salt Lake City, UT Russ Farley, Phone (800) 574-4369, FAX 801- 484-6817, e-mail russf@absdoors.com. 2. Beacon Metals Inc, Salt Lake City, UT Jared Butler, Phone (888) 823-2206, FAX 801-485-764, e-mail jared@beacon-metals.com. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before ordering materials, examine documents to be assured that material to be ordered is appropriate for substrate to which it is to be secured and will function as intended. END OF SECTION Common Finish Hardware Requirements - 2 - 087101 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 08 7102 HANGING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 10i��l u1T1IT, L\ i'1 A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Hinges for flush wood and hollow metal doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 7101: Common Hardware Requirements. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Hinges: 1. Sizes: a. 1-3/4 inch doors and fire -rated doors in metal frames: 1) Standard: 4-1/2 inches by 4-1/2 inches. 2) Wide Throw: 4-1/2 inches by width required. b. 1-3/4 inch non -fire -rated wood doors in wood frames: 4 inches by 4 inches. c. 1-3/8 inch wood or metal doors: 3-1/2 inches by 3-1/2 inches. 2. Use non -removable pins on exterior opening doors. 3. Class One Quality Standards. See Section 01 6200 a. Interior: Hager AB850. b. Equals by Ives, McKinney, PBB, or Stanley. 4. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Interior: 1) Hager: BB 1279. 2) Ives: 5BB1. 3) McKinney: TA 2714. 4) MacPro / McKinney: MPB79 5) PBB: BB81. 6) Stanley: FBB 179. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A Approved Manufacturers: 1. Hager Companies, St Louis, MO www.hagerhinge.com. 2. Ives, New Haven, CT www.iveshardware.com. 3. McKinney, Scranton, PA www.mckinneyhinge.com. 4. PBB, Ontario, CA www.pbbinc.com. 5. Stanley, New Britain, CT www.stanleyworks.com. PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Hanging Devices - 1 - 087102 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 08 7103 SECURING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL bYUr(IiTJ_1 WA A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Items for architectural wood or hollow metal doors: a. Locksets and latchsets. b. Cylinders. c. Interior exit devices. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 7101: Common Hardware Requirements. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Standard Key Delivery: 1. Include change keys with hardware. 2. Before Final Acceptance Meeting, send master keys to architect. PART 2 -PRODUCTS PAM IT, ItV01WAOII :70111.11f9 A. General: 1. Backsets shall be 2-3/4 inches. 2. Provide metal dust box strikes for wood frames. 3. Furnish lead shields where required. B. Locksets And Latchsets: 1. Lever Operated: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) ND Series by Schlage. To receive owner provided and installed Primus I.C. C. Exit Devices: 1. Use operable lever trim. 2. Provide labeled hardware where required by local code authority. 3. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. 98 Series by Von Duprin. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Contact Information: 1. Abus, 2. Corbin Russwin, Berlin, CT www.corbinrusswin.com. 3. Glynn -Johnson, Indianapolis, IN www.glynn-johnson.com. 4. Hager, St Louis, MO www.hagerhinge.com. 5. Ives, New Haven, CT www.iveshardware.com. 6. Knape & Vogt, Grand Rapids, MI www.knapeandvogt.com. 7. Master Lock, Oak Creek, WI Securing Devices - 1 - 087103 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 8. Precision Hardware, Romulus, MI www.precisionhardware.com. 9. Rockwood, Manufacturing Co, Rockwood, PA www.rockwoodmfg.com. 10. Sargent, New Haven, CT www.sargentlock.com. 11. Schlage, Colorado Springs, CO www.schlage.com. 12. Von Duprin, Indianapolis, IN www.vonduprin.com. PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Securing Devices - 2 - 087103 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 SECTION 08 7105 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Coordinators. 2. Meeting Stiles. 3. Astragals for wood doors. Austin Welding Lab Design B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 7101: Common Hardware Requirements and VMR Suppliers. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Coordinators: 1. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 016200 for definitions of Categories. a. CO2 x FB1 by Glynn Johnson. b. 297D by Hager. c. Series 900 by Ives. d. 1600 Series by Rockwood. B. Meeting Stiles: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. <Insert Product> by Hager. b. 136N by NGP. c. 369AS by Pemko. d. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 016200. C. Astragals: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. <Insert Product> by Hager. b. <Insert Product> by NGP. c. <Insert Product> by Pemko. d. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Contact Information: 1. Glynn -Johnson, Indianapolis, IN www.glynn-johnson.com. 2. Hager, St Louis, MO www.hagerhinge.com. 3. Ives, Wallingford, CT www.iveshardware.com. 4. National Guard Products - NGP, Memphis, TN www.ngpinc.com. 5. Pemko Manufacturing, Ventura, CA www.pemko.com. 6. Rockwood Manufacturing Co, Rockwood, PA www.rockwoodmfg.com. Accessories for Pairs of Doors - 1 - 087105 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Accessories for Pairs of Doors - 2 - 087105 Y Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 08 7106 CLOSING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Closers for flush wood doors and hollow metal doors. B. Related Sections 1. Section 08 7101: Common Hardware Requirements: 1.2 WARRANTY A. Provide Manufacturer's standard warranty, 5 years minimum. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Surface -Mounted Overhead Door Closers: 1. Closers provided under this Section shall be from same Manufacturer. 2. Provide parallel arms on closers unless door position in relation to adjacent wall requires otherwise. Provide covers. 3. Closers shall allow for 180 degree opening and not be used as a stop. 4. Closers shall have following features: a. Adjustable sweep speed. b. Adjustable backcheck. c. Non -handed, non -sized. 5. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. 4041 Series by LCN Closers, Princeton, IL www.Icnclosers.com. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount closers on stop side of door wherever conditions permit. B. Through -bolt hardware -to -door connections. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust closers to provide maximum opening force as required by governing code authority and proper backcheck and sweep speed. END OF SECTION Closing Devices - 1 - 087106 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 08 7107 PROTECTIVE PLATES AND TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Kick plates. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 7101: Common Hardware Requirements and VMR Suppliers. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Protective Plates: 1. Material: 0.050 inch thick Stainless Steel. 2. Sizes: a. Kick Plates: 10 inches high by width of door less 3/4 inch on each side. 3. Type Two Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Glynn -Johnson, Indianapolis, IN www.glynn-johnson.com. b. Hager, St Louis, MO (800) 255-3590 or (314) 772-4400 www.hagerhinge.com. c. Ives, Wallingford, CT www.iveshardware.com. d. Rockwood Manufacturing Co, Rockwood, PA www.rockwoodmfg.com. e. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Protective Plates And Trim - 1 - 087107 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 08 7108 STOPS AND HOLDERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Door stops. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 7101: Common Hardware Requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Stops: 1. Use wall type stops unless indicated otherwise on Door Schedule. 2. Provide model appropriate for substrate. Wall stops may be either cast or wrought. 3. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Interior Wall Exterior Wall Floor Mount Overhead. b. Hager 236W 255W 243F - - - c. Ives WS407CCV WS447 FS438 - - - d. Rockwood 409 474/475 440/441 --- e. Corbin Russwin - - - - - - - - - DH5203 Series f. Glynn Johnson --- --- --- GJ90S g. Sargent - - - - - - - - - 590S Series h. Equal as approved by Architect before Installation. See Section 01 6200. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Contact Information: 1. Corbin Russwin, Berlin, CT www.corbinrusswin.com. 2. Glynn -Johnson, Indianapolis, IN www.glynn-johnson.com. 3. Hager, St Louis, MO www.hagerhinge.com, 4. Ives, Wallingford, CT www.iveshardware.com. 5. Rockwood Manufacturing Co, Rockwood, PA www.rockwoodmfg.com. 6. Sargent, New Haven, CT (800) 906-6606 or (203) 562-2151 www.sargentlock.com. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: When using overhead stops, coordinate installation with door closer and other door hardware. END OF SECTION Stops And Holders - 1 - 087108 Project # 3885 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 6-25-2010 SECTION 08 7109 ACCESSORIES Austin Welding Lab Design A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Metal thresholds where required for wood doors and hollow metal doors. 2. Weatherstripping for exterior hollow metal doors. 3. Acoustical seals. 4. Silencers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 7101: Common Hardware Requirements and VMR Suppliers. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Weatherstripping: 1. Type One Acceptable Products: a. Perimeter: 1) 800S by Hager. 2) A625A by NGP. 3) 35041CP by Pemko. b. Bottom: 1) Equal by Hager. 2) 198NA by NGP. 3) Equal by Pemko. c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. B. Acoustical Seals: 1. Color as selected by Architect. 2. Type One Acceptable Products: a. Door Bottom for Wood Door: 1) 13VDkB by NGP. 2) 211 DV by Pemko. b. Door Bottom for Metal Door: 1) 779S -A by Hager. 2) 35EV by NGP. 3) 217AV by Pemko. c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Contact Information: 1. Hager, St Louis, MO www.hagerhinge.com. 2. Ives, Wallingford, CT www.iveshardware.com. 3. NGP - National Guard Products, Memphis, TN www.ngpinc.com. 4. Pemko Manufacturing, Ventura, CA www.pemko.com. Accessories - 1 - 087109 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Austin Welding Lab Design A. Install smoke gaskets and acoustical seals in manner to give continuous air -tight fit. 1. Install acoustical seal with seal under door. END OF SECTION Accessories -2- 087109 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 08 8100 GLASS GLAZING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of glazing used in entries, doors, and windows. B. Related Sections: 1. Sections Under 08 1000 Heading: Furnishing and installing of flush wood door Iites in new doors. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society For Testing And Materials: 1. ASTM C 1036-01, 'Standard Specification For Flat Glass.' 2. ASTM C 1048-04, 'Standard Specification For Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind H, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.' 3. ASTM E 774-97, 'Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Glazing shall meet applicable requirements of Federal Consumer Product Safety Standard 16CFR1201. B. Manufacturer's Labels: Labels showing strength, grade, thickness, type, and quality are required on each piece of glass. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL A. Storefront Glazing: 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Glazing shall have following characteristics: a. Clear: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I, Quality q3. b. Low E: 1) Performance Standard: Energy Advantage Clear by LOF. a) 70 percent Visible light transmission. b) 0.29 U -value winter, 0.28 U -value summer. c) 0.38 SHGC. d) 0.44 Shading coefficient. e) 11 percent Outdoor visible light reflectance. 2) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) AFG. b) LOF. c) PPG. d) Visteon. e) Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. c. Glazing below door height shall be tempered meeting requirements of ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class I, Quality q3. Glass Glazing - 1 - 088100 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Contact Information for Low E Glazing Manufacturers: 1. AFG Industries, Kingsport, TN www.afg.com. 2. Pilkington Libby -Owens -Ford - LOF, Toledo, OH www.pilkington.com. 3. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh, PA www.ppgglass.com. 4. Versalux, Tulsa, OK www.versaIuxglass.com 2.3 FABRICATION A. Except where glass exceeds 66 inches in width, cut clear glass so any wave will run horizontally when glazed. B. Sealed, Insulating Glazing Units: 1. Double pane, sealed insulating glass units meeting requirements of ASTM E 774, Class A. Install at exterior windows and exterior aluminum -framed storefront. 2. Unit Thickness: 5/8 inch minimum, one inch maximum. 3. Insulated obscure units shall consist of one pane of specified obscure glass and one pane of standard glass. 4. Type Seal: a. Metal -to -glass bond and separated by 1/2 inch dehydrated air space. b. Use non -hardening sealants. 5. Category Four Approved Fabricators. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Members of Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturer's Association. PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used END OF SECTION Glass Glazing - 2 - 088100 DIVISION 09: FINISHES 092000 PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 09 6000 FLOOR I N G 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 098000 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT 098116 ACOUSTIC BLANKET INSULATION 099000 PAINTS AND COATINGS 099001 COMMON PAINTING AND COATING REQUIREMENTS 099121 INTERIOR PAINTED POURED CONCRETE 099122 INTERIOR PAINTED CMU 099123 INTERIOR PAINTED GYPSUM BOARD, PLASTER 099124 INTERIOR PAINTED METAL 099321 INTERIOR SEALED CONCRETE FLOORS 099413 INTERIOR TEXTURED FINISHING 099653 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 1 - Document 09 0000 `F at:. �„ e,t;t 1.. ,n� �, _ : �:,.: Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install metal framing and furring systems and blocking as described in Contract Documents, 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society For Testing And Materials: 1. ASTM C 645-04, 'Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members.' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: ICBO approved. B. Pre -Installation Conference: Schedule pre -installation conference to be held after submittals have been reviewed and returned by Architect, but before beginning metal framing work. Identify location of required blocking. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Framing: 1. 20 ga minimum, unless noted greater on Drawings, meeting requirements of ASTM C 645. 2. Tracks, bridging, blocking, strapping, and other accessories shall be as described in Contract Documents or as required by Manufacturer's system. 3. Type One Acceptable Products: a. 3-518 IC 20 ga by American Studco. b. 362DS20P by CEMCO. c. Drywall Metal, 20 ga only, by Clark Western. d. 20 Ga STE by Dietrich Industries. e. 20 Ga 3-518 SS Series by Steeler Inc. f. Any member of Steel Stud Manufacturer's Assdciation (SSMA). g. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. B. Furring Channels: 1. Hat Shaped Channels: Roll formed from DWC-25 corrosion resistant steel in sizes shown on Drawings. 2. 'Z' Shaped Channels: 20 gaminimum galvanized steel in sizes shown on Drawings. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Contact Information: 1. Allied Studco Inc, Phoenix, AZ www.studco.com. 2. CEMCO, City of Industry, CA www.cemcosteel.com. Non -Structural Metal Framing - 1 - 092216 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 3. Clark Western, Cincinnati, OH www.clarksteel.com. 4. Dietrich Industries Inc, Pittsburgh, PA www.dietrichindustries.com. 5. Stealer Inc, Seattle, WA www.steeler.com. 6. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Specifications of Stud Wall Manufacturer shall govern this work unless more stringent requirements are required by Contract Documents. B. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with other Sections to provide blocking necessary for their work. 2. Coordinate with other Sections for location of blocking required for installation of equipment and building specialties. C. Wall Tolerances: 1. 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non -cumulative in length of wall. 2. 1/8 inch in 10 feet with 1/4 inch maximum in height of wall. 3. Distances between parallel walls shall be 1/4 inch maximum along length and height of wall. D. Framing: 1. Install specified sill sealer under sill plates of exterior walls and of acoustically insulated interior walls. 2. Stiffen metal -framed walls with 3/4 inch cold -rolled channels placed horizontally approximately 48 inches on center and securely attach to each stud. 3. Similarly reinforce door and window openings at headers with reinforcing channel extending 18 inches minimum each side of opening. 4. Apply double framing members at openings. Wrap multiple, adjacent framing members with duct tape or otherwise secure to eliminate 'chattering.' 5. Use grommets at framing penetrations where unsecured items pass through. END OF SECTION Non -Structural Metal Framing - 2 - 092216 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install gypsum board as described in Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Gypsum Association: 1. GA -214-90: 'Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.' B. American Society For Testing And Materials: 1. ASTM C 36-03, 'Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.' 2. ASTM C 475-02, 'Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.' 3. ASTM C 840-01, 'Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.' 4. ASTM C 1002-01, 'Standard Specification for Steel Self -Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panels or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.' 5. ASTM C 1047-04, 'Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base.' 6. ASTM C 1396-04, 'Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Schedule pre -installation conference immediately before installation of gypsum wallboard. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3000, review finish requirements necessary for installation of finish materials over gypsum wallboard. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name, applicable standard designation, and Manufacturer's name. B. Store material under roof and keep dry. Stack gypsum board flat and protect from damage. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Temperature shall be 50 deg F and 95 deg F maximum day and night during entire joint operation and until execution of Certificate of Substantial Completion. 2. Provide ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture. 3. Avoid hot air drafts that will cause too rapid drying. Gypsum Board - 1 - 092900 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Interior Gypsum Board: 1. Impact Resistant: a. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1) ProRoc Abuse Resistant by BPB. 2) Kal-Kore Hi -Impact 1000 by National Gypsum. 3) Fiberock VHl by USG. 2. Fire -Rated Construction: a. Class Two Quality Standard: Product meeting requirements of ASTM C 36, C 1396, Type X, UL one-hour rated, tapered edge, face paper suitable for painting. 3. Non -Fire -Rated Construction: a. Class Two Quality Standard: Product meeting requirements of ASTM C 36, C 1396. Board installed in areas accessible to public shall have tapered edge to accommodate taping and face paper suitable for painting. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Gypsum Board Mounting Accessories: 1. Class Two Quality Standards: a. Furring Channels: 1) Walls: Galvanized DWC-25 by USG. b. Resilient Channels: RC -1 by USG. c. Other accessories as required by Manufacturer's fire tests to provide necessary fire ratings. B. Corner And Edge Trim: 1. Metal, paper -faced metal, paper -faced plastic, or solid vinyl meeting requirements of ASTM C 1047. Surfaces to receive bedding cement treated for maximum bonding. C. Joint Compound: 1. Best grade or type recommended by Board Manufacturer and meeting requirements of ASTM C 475. a. Use Taping Compound for first coat to embed tape and accessories. b. Use Taping Compound or All -Purpose Compound for subsequent coats except final coat. c. Use Finishing Compound for final coat and for skim coat. D. Joint Reinforcing: Paper reinforcing tape acceptable to Board Manufacturer. Primer / Surfacer Under Surfaces To Receive Texturing: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Sheetrock First Coat by USG. b. Prep Coat by Westpac Materials. - c. ProForm Surfacer / Primer by National Gypsum. d. Level Coat by Magnum Products. e. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. F. Primer Under Surfaces To Receive Wallcovering: 1. White, self -sizing, water based, all purpose wallcovering primer. 2. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Shieldz Universal Pre-Wallcovering Primer by Wm. Zinsser and Company b. Equal as approved by Architect before application. See Section 01 6200. G. Fasteners: 1. Bugle head screws meeting requirements of ASTM C 1002. Gypsum Board - 2 - 092900 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design a. Types: 1) Type S: For fastening gypsum board to steel framing and ceiling suspension members, of length to penetrate steel framing 3/8 inch minimum. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A. Contact Information: 1. Beadex Drywall Accessories, Auburn, WA www.usg.com. 2. Chicago Metallic, Chicago, IL www.chicagometallic.com, 3. Georgia Pacific, Atlanta, GA (800) 225-6119 or (404) 652-4000. www.gp.com 4. Westpac Materials Inc, Orange, CA www.westpacmaterials.com. 5. Magnum Products, Lenaxa, KS www.levelcoat.com. 6. National Gypsum, Charlotte, NC www.nationalgypsum.com. 7. Structus Building Technologies, Bend, OR www.no-coat.com. 8. United States Gypsum Co, Chicago, IL www.usg.com. 9. Wm. Zinsser & Co, Somerset, NJ www.zinsser.com. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: Coordinate with Division 06 for location of backblocking for edges and ends of gypsum board and for blocking required for installation of equipment and building specialties. Do not install gypsum board until required blocking is in place. B. General: Install and finish as recommended in ASTM C 840 unless specified otherwise in this Section. C. Mounting Accessories: 1. Furring Channels: Apply with screws through flanges into each framing member. D. Interior Gypsum Board: 1. General: a. Install so trim and reinforcing tape are fully backed by gypsum board. No hollow spaces between pieces of gypsum board over 1/8 inch wide before taping are acceptable. b. Rout out backside of gypsum board to accommodate items that extend beyond face of framing, but do not penetrate face of gypsum board, such as metal door frame mounting brackets, etc. 2. Single Layer Application: a. Apply ceilings first using minimum of two men. b. Use board of length to give minimum number of joints. c. On walls over 108 inches high and on ceilings, apply board perpendicular to support. d. Stagger end joints. End and edge joints of board applied on ceilings shall occur over framing members or be back blocked with 2x4 blocking. End joints of board horizontally applied on walls shall occur over framing members. Edge joints of board vertically applied on walls shall occur over framing members. e. Butt edges in moderate contact. Do not force in place. Shim to level. f. Leave facings true with joint, finishing flush. Vertical work shall be plumb and ceiling surfaces level. g. Scribe work closely. Keep joints as far from openings as possible. If joints occur near an opening, apply board so vertical joints are centered over openings. No vertical joints shall occur within 8 inches of external corners or openings. h. Install board tight against support with joints even and true. Tighten loose screws. i. Calk perimeter joints in sound insulated rooms with specified acoustical sealant. 3. Double Layer Application: Gypsum Board -3- 092900 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design a. Apply base layer as specified for single layer application, except edge joints need not occur over framing members or be back blocked. b. Apply face layer with joints staggered in relationship to base and occurring over supports. Use combination of adhesive and screws if required to meet Manufacturer's specifications for fire -rated assembly. Apply screws attaching face layer through base layer into support for specified penetration. 4. Fastening: a. Apply from center of board towards ends and edges. b. Apply screws 3/8 inch minimum from ends and edges, one inch maximum from edges, and 1/2 inch maximum from ends. c. Spacing: 1) Ends: Screws not over 7 inches on center at edges where blocking or framing occurs. 2) Metal Framed Walls: Screws 12 inches on center in panel field. d. Set screw heads 1/32 inch below plane of board, but do not break face paper. If face is accidentally broken, apply additional screw 2 inches away. e. Screws on adjacent ends or edges shall be opposite each other. f. Drive screws with shank perpendicular to face of board. 5. Trim: a. Corner Beads: 1) Attach corner beads to outside corners. a) Attach metal corner bead with staples spaced 4 inches on center maximum and flat taped over edges of corner bead. Also, apply screw through edge of corner bead where wood trim will overlay corner bead. b) Set paper -faced trim in solid bed of taping compound. b. Edge Trim: Apply where gypsum board abuts dissimilar material in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. Hold channel and 'L' trim back from exterior metal window and metal door frames 1/8 inch to allow for calking. 6. Finishing: a. General: 1) Tape and finish joints and corners throughout building as specified below to correspond with final finish material to be applied to gypsum board. When sanding, do not raise nap of gypsum board face paper or paper -faced trim. 2) First Coat: a) Apply tape over center of joint in complete, uniform bed of specified taping compound and wipe with ajoint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound. If metal corner bead is used, apply reinforcing tape over flange of metal corner bead and trim so half of tape width is on flange and half is on gypsum board. b) Completely fill gouges, dents, and fastener dimples. c) Allow to dry and sand lightly if necessary to eliminate high spots or excessive compound. 3) Second Coat: a) Apply coat of specified joint compound over embedded tape extending 3-1/2 incheson both sides of joint center. Use finishing compound only if applied coat is intended as final coat. b) Re -coat gouges, dents, and fastener dimples. c) Allow to dry and sand lightly to eliminate high spots or excessive compound. 4) Third Coat: Apply same as second coat except extend application 6 inches on both sides of joint center. Allow to dry and sand with fine sandpaper or wipe with damp sponge. 5) Fourth Coat: Apply same as second coat except extend application 9 inches on both sides of joint center. Allow to dry and sand with fine sandpaper or wipe with damp sponge. b. Finishing Levels: To match existing. 1) Gypsum Board Surfaces to Receive Vinyl Wall Covering, Acoustic Wall Carpeting, Multi -Color Coating System, and Painted Texturing, and Smooth Gypsum Board Surfaces: a) GA -214-96 Level Four: 'Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over flatjoints Gypsum Board - 4 - 092900 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design and one separate coat of joint compound applied over interior angles. Cover fastener heads. and accessories with three separate coats of joint compound. Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Coat prepared surface with specified primer/ surfacer.' 3.2 CLEANING A. Remove from site debris resulting from work of this Section including taping compound spills. END OF SECTION Gypsum Board -5- 092900 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 09 6513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install rubber base as described in Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM F 1861-02, 'Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet on base and adhesive. 2. Color selection. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Project Environmental Requirements: 1. Store materials at not less than 70 deg F for at least 24 hours before using. 2. Do not apply in temperatures below 70 deg F. 2.1 MATERIAL A. General: 1. Molded or extruded meeting requirements of ASTM F 1861, Type TP: a. Thermoplastic rubber, free from objectionable odors, blisters, cracks, and other defects affecting appearance or serviceability of rubber, and not containing fabric. b. Color pigments used shall be highly fade -resistant, insoluble in water, and resistant to light, alkali, and cleaning agents. c. Color Quality Standard: Dark Gray by Roppe. d. Colors as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors. Base: 1. Size: 1/8 inch by 4 inch. No joints between corners. 2. Use preformed, molded external corners. Butt joint interior corners. 3. Style: Coved. C. Adhesive: Best for work as recommended by Manufacturer. D. Category Four Approved Manufacturers. See Section 016200 for definitions of Categories. 1. Activa Rubber Flooring, Carlstadt, NJ www.rubberfloors.com. 2. American Floor Products Co Inc (AFCO-USA), Gaithersburg, MD www.afco-usa.com. 3. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, San Jose, CA www.burkemercer.com. Resilient Base And Accessories - 1 - 096513 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 4. Flexco by ESD Flooring Systems, Tuscumbia, AL www.marleyflexco.com. 5. Johnsonite Flooring Products Div, Chagrin Falls, OH www.johnsonite.com. 6. Roppe Rubber Corporation, Fostoria, OH www.roppe.com. 7. Vinyl Plastics Inc VPI, Sheboygan, WI www.vpicorp.com. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect surfaces for conditions not suitable for installation. Surface to receive specified items shall be sound, clean, free from foreign matter, tightly nailed, and dry. Do not start work until defects are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remedy cracks and minor irregularities in substrate in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in manner to produce smooth, even finished surfaces tightly jointed and accurately aligned. B. Fit specified items tightly. Use fillers where necessary. Fit neatly against projections, piping, electrical service outlets, etc. C. Secure specified items with specified adhesive. Cement substantially to vertical surfaces including rubber base to cabinet work base. D. Line up top and bottom lines of base throughout. E. Roll until firm bond has been established. Leave level, free from buckles, cracks, and projecting edges. F. In wall runs longer than 12 inches, install no lengths of base shorter than 12 inches long. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Inspect and make necessary adjustments within one month after mechanical heat or other heat has been supplied continuously in finished areas. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Keep traffic away until adhesive has set. END OF SECTION Resilient Base And Accessories - 2 - 096513 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 09 6519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install resilient tile flooring as described in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's literature or cut sheet on each component of system. 2. Maintenance instructions. 3. Color and style selection. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Project Environmental Conditions: Maintain 70 deg F minimum during application. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforced Vinyl Tile: 1. 'Marbleized' or'Thru-chip' Pattern 1/8 inch by 12 inches square. Do not furnish tile which does not have its pattern and color extended continuously through entire thickness. 2. Meet or exceed Fed Spec SS -T -312b, Type IV. 3. Color Quality Standards: No. 143, Flax by Mannington Commercial, Salem, NJ www.mannington.com. 4. Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard colors and patterns. 5. Type One Acceptable Products: a. Essentials by Mannington Commercial, Salem, NJ www.mannington.com. 6. Type One Acceptable Products: a. Excelon by Armstrong World Industries. b. Cortina VCT by Azrock Industries. c. Essentials by Mannington Commercial. d. Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. B. Adhesive: Water-resistant type. Best grade in accordance with Tile Manufacturer's recommendations. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Contact Information: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Lancaster, PA www.armstrong.com or Armstrong World Industries Canada Ltd, Flooring Div, Mississauga, ON (905) 826-4832. 2. Azrock Industries, Houton, TX www.tarkettcommercial.com/us/. 3. Mannington Commercial, Salem, NJ www.mannington.com. Resilient Tile Flooring - 1 - 096519 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Variation In Grade: Plus or minus 1/8 inch in any 10 feet of floor slab and distance between high point and low point of slab of 1/2 inch. 2. Testing Procedure: Place ends of straightedge on 3/8 inch high shims. Floor is satisfactory if 1/4 inch diameter steel rod rolled under straightedge will not touch anywhere along 10 foot length and 1/2 inch diameter steel rod will not fit under straightedge anywhere along 10 foot length. 3. Notify Architect in writing if floor surface is not acceptable to install tile. Do not lay tile over unsuitable surface. Commencing installation constitutes acceptance of floor and approval of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Lay tile symmetrically about center line of spaces to insure even borders, unless shown differently on Drawings. Lay tile quarter -turned. B. Install beveled edge stripping at terminal edges of tile except at ceramic tile, carpet, and where Drawings indicate different detail. Conceal edging strips beneath doors. END OF SECTION Resilient Tile Flooring - 2 - 096519 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 SECTION 09 8116 ACOUSTIC BLANKET INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Insulation for acoustical walls. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS Austin Welding Lab Design A. Acoustical insulation blankets without facing. B. Type Two Acceptable Product: 1. Thermafiber SAFB Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets by Thermafiber, Wabash, IN www.thermafiber.com. 2. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 016200. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install to fit stud condition. B. Gaps that would allow sound leaks are not permissible. END OF SECTION Acoustic Blanket Insulation - 1 - 098116 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 09 9001 COMMON PAINTING AND COATING REQUIREMENTS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Common procedures and requirements for field -applied painting and coating. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 0503: 2. Section 07 9213: 3. Section 09 2900: 4. Section 09 9413: 1.2 REFERENCES Quality of shop priming of steel and iron. Quality of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. Priming of gypsum board before texturing. Textured finishing. A. Master Painters Institute - 1 - nstitute:1. MPI(a), Mar 2001, 'Architectural Painting Specification Manual.' 2. MPI(r), Mar 2001, 'Maintenance Repainting Manual.' 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Levels: 1. Specified paint gloss level shall be defined as sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with following terms and values. unless snpniflpd nfhpr iCp fnr a enpri6 ;_+ ..,..1...... Gloss Level '1' Traditional matte finish - 0 to 5 units at 60 degrees to 10 units maximum flat at 85 degrees. Gloss Level 7 High side sheen flat - 10 units maximum at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 'velvet-like' finish units at 85 degrees. Gloss Level '3' Traditional 'eggshell -like 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units finish at 85 degrees. Gloss Level '4' 'Satin -like' finish 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and 35 units min- imum at 85 de rees. Gloss Level 'S' Traditional semi -gloss 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees. Gloss Level '6' Traditional gloss 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees. Gloss Level "7' High gloss More than 85 units at 60 degrees. B. Properly Painted Surface: Surface that is uniform in appearance, color, and sheen and free of foreign material, lumps, skins, runs, sags, holidays, misses, strike -through, and insufficient coverage. Surface free of drips, spatters, spills, and overspray caused by Paint Applicator. Compliance will be determined when viewed without magnification at a distance of 5 feet minimum under normal lighting conditions and from normal viewing position (MPI(a), PDCA P1.92). C. Damage Caused By Others: Damage caused by individuals other than those under direct control of Painting Applicator (MPI(a), PDCA P1.92). D. Latent Damage: Damage or conditions beyond control of Painting Applicator caused by conditions not apparent at time of initial painting or coating work. Common Painting And Coating Requirements - 1 - 099001 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Include following information for each painting system, arranged in same order as in Project Manual. a. Manufacturer's cut sheet for each component of system indicating ingredients and percentages by weight and by volume, environmental restrictions for application, and film thicknesses and spread rates. b. Copies of appropriate entries from MPI Approved Product List. Products from MPI Approved Product List is mandatory for Sections 09 9112, 09 9123 and 09 9124. If proposed manufacturer has products listed for these three Sections, but not for other Sections, Architect may approve products submitted by proposed manufacturer for other Sections. c. Manufacturer's substrate preparation instructions and application instruction for each painting system used on Project. d. Confirmation of colors selected and that each area to be painted or coated has color selected for it. 2. Provide two copies of Product Data submission, one copy to be kept on Project site and second copy to be included in Operations And Maintenance Manual. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Paint and painting materials shall be free of lead and mercury, and have VOC levels acceptable to local jurisdiction. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver specified products in sealed, original containers with Manufacturer's original labels intact on each container. Deliver amount of materials necessary to meet Project requirements in single shipment. B. Store materials in single place. C. Keep storage area clean and rectify any damage to area at completion of work of this Section. Maintain storage area at 55 deg F minimum. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Project Environmental Conditions: 1. Perform painting operations at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by Manufacturer for each operation and for each product. 2. Apply painting systems at lighting level of 540 Lux (50 foot candles) minimum on surfaces to be painted. Inspection of painting work shall take place under same lighting conditions as application. If painting and coating work is applied under temporary lighting, deficiencies discovered upon installation of permanent lighting will be considered latent damage as defined in MPI Manual, PDCA P1-92 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Coordinate with other trades for materials and systems that require painting before installation. B. Schedule painting and coating work to begin when work upon which painting and coating work is dependent has been completed. Schedule installation of pre -finished and non -painted items, which are to be installed on painted surfaces, after application of final finishes. Common Painting And Coating Requirements - 2 - 099001 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials used for any painting system shall be from single manufacturer unless approved otherwise in writing by painting system manufacturer. Include such approvals in Product Data submittal. B. Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, and other painting materials shall be pure, be compatible with other coating materials, bear identifying labels on containers, and be of highest quality of an approved manufacturer listed in MPI manuals. Tinting color shall be best grade of type recommended by Manufacturer of paint or stain used on Project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPROVED APPLICATORS A. Applicator shall have experience in application of specified products for five years minimum and be acceptable to Architect and Paint Manufacturer, 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Instructions to applicator to begin painting and coating work will indicate that substrates to receive painting and coating materials have been previously inspected as part of work of other Sections and are complete and ready for application of painting and coating systems as specified in those Sections. B. Before beginning work of this Section, examine, and test surfaces to be painted or coated for adhesion of painting and coating systems. Report in writing to Architect of conditions that will adversely affect adhesion of painting and coating work. Do not apply painting and coating systems until party responsible for adverse condition has corrected adverse condition. C. Report defects in substrates that become apparent after application of primer or first finish coat to Architect in writing and do not proceed with further work on defective substrate until such defects are corrected by party responsible for defect. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Remove rags and waste used in painting operations from building each night. Take every precaution to avoid danger of fire. I 2. Protect other finish work and adjacent materials during painting. Do not splatter, drip, or paint surfaces not intended to be painted. These items will not be spelled out in detail but pay special attention to the following: a. Do not paint finish copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel, stainless steel, anodized aluminum, or monel metal except as explicitly specified. b. Keep cones of ceiling speakers completely free of paint. In all cases where painting of metal speaker grilles is required, paint without grilles mounted to speakers and without grilles on ceiling. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI requirements and requirements of Manufacturer for each painting system specified, unless instructed differently in Contract Documents. Bring conflicts to attention of Architect in writing. 2. Fill minor holes and cracks in wood surfaces to receive paint or stain. Common Painting And Coating Requirements - 3 - 099001 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 3. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of loose dirt. Clean and dust surfaces before painting or finishing. 4. Do no exterior painting while surface is damp, unless recommended by Manufacturer, nor during rainy or frosty weather. Interior surfaces shall be dry before painting. Moisture content of materials to be painted shall be within tolerances acceptable to Paint Manufacturer. 5. Sand woodwork smooth in direction of grain leaving no sanding marks. Clean surfaces before proceeding with stain or first coat application. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Paint or finish complete all surfaces to be painted or coated as described in Contract Documents, including but not limited to following items. 1. Finish casework and wood trims that are specified to be installed under Section 06 2001 and that are not called out to be factory- or shop -finished. Back prime wood elements to be installed against concrete or masonry or that may be subjected to moisture. 2. Paint mechanical, electrical, and audio/visual items that require field painting as indicated in Contract Documents: B. Apply sealant in gaps 3/16 inch and smaller between two substrates that are both to be painted or coated. Sealants in other gaps furnished and installed under Section 07 9213. C. On wood to receive a transparent finish, putty nail holes in wood after application of stain using natural colored type to match wood stain color. Bring putty flush with adjoining surfaces. D. In multiple coat paint work, tint each succeeding coat with slightly lighter color, but approximating shade of final coat, so it is possible to check application of specified number of coats. Tint final coat to required color. E. Spread materials smoothly and evenly. Apply coats to not less than wet and dry film thicknesses and at spreading rates for specified products as recommended by Manufacturer. F. Touch up suction spots after application of first finish coat. G. Paint shall be thoroughly dry and surfaces clean before applying succeeding coats. H. Use fine sandpaper between coats as necessary to produce even, smooth surfaces. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean, sharp, and without overlapping. Finished work shall be a'Properly Painted Surface' as defined in this Section. 3.5 ADJUSTMENT A. Correct deficiencies in workmanship as required to leave surfaces in conformance with 'Properly Painted Surface,' as defined in this Section. Correction of'Latent Damage' and 'Damage Caused By Others,' as defined in this Section, is not included in work of this Section. 3.6 CLEANING A. As work proceeds and upon completion of work of any painting Section, remove paint spots from floors, walls, glass, or other surfaces and leave work clean, orderly, and in acceptable condition. Remove debris caused by work of paint Sections from premises. Common Painting And Coating Requirements - 4 - 099001 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 3.7 PAINT COLOR SCHEDULE Austin Welding Lab Design A. Color Levels: 1. Color Level II: a. Number and placement of interior and exterior paint colors and gloss levels shall be as defined by Color Level II from MPI Manual, PDCA P3-93 as modified in following paragraph. b. No more than one paint color or gloss level will be selected for same substrate within designated interior rooms or exterior areas. B. Colors: 1. Interior: a. Interior Gypsum Board, Plaster: Match other interior opaque finished building elements. b. Interior Clear Finished Wood: Match other interior clear finished wood building elements. See Section 09 9324. END OF SECTION Common Painting And Coating Requirements - 5 - 099001 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 09 9121 INTERIOR PAINTED POURED CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparing and painting of new concrete floors to be left exposed in finished building, as described in Contract Documents. 2. Preparing and painting following existing concrete floors as described in Contract Documents: a. Striping in front of existing electrical panels in rooms 157 and 170. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 9001: Common Painting Requirements. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 3.2A Latex Finish system B. Previously Finished Surfaces: Use MPI(r) RIN 3.2A Latex Finish system. C. Finish Requirements: Use MPI Custom Grade finish requirements. PART 2 -PRODUCTS A. Gloss / Sheen Level Required: Semi`Gloss. B. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located. 2. MPI Product 60. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. General: See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. B. Existing Painted Surfaces: 1. Remove deteriorated existing paint down to sound substrate by scraping and sanding. Feather edges of existing paint by sanding to be smooth with adjacent surfaces. Acid etch bare concrete areas, if necessary. 2. Clean floors as recommended by Paint Manufacturer. 3. Apply coating system. END OF SECTION Interior Painted Poured Concrete - 1 - 099121 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 09 9122 INTERIOR PAINTED CMU PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparing and painting new interior CMU walls as described in Contract Documents. 2. Preparing and painting existing interior CMU surfaces listed below as described in Contract Documents: a. Existing and new CMU walls in rooms 157 and 170. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 9001: Common Painting Requirements. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. New Surfaces: 1. Use MPI(a) INT 4.2F Waterborne Epoxy Finish system. 2. Use MPI(a) INT 4.21) Latex Finish system B. Rest Rooms, Font Rooms, And Custodial Rooms: 1. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 4.2F Waterborne Epoxy Finish system. 2. Previously Finished Surfaces: Use MPI(r) RIN 4.2E Waterborne Epoxy Finish system. C. All Other: 1. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 4.21) Latex Finish system. 2. Previously Finished Surfaces: Use MPI(r) REX 4.21-1 Latex Finish system. D. Finish Requirements: 1. New Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. 2. Deteriorated Existing Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. 3. Sound Existing Surfaces: MPI Custom Grade requirements. E. Use MPI(a) INT 4.2D Latex Finish system F. Use MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Gloss / Sheen Level Required: Gloss Level 5. B. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located. 2. Block Filler, Over New Masonry Only: MPI Product 4. 3. Finish Coats: a. Latex System: MPI Product 141. b. Epoxy System: MPI Product 77. Interior Painted CMU - 1 - 099122 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. General: See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. B. Existing Painted Surfaces: 1. Remove deteriorated existing paint by scraping or sanding. Wash surfaces that have been defaced with marking pens, crayons, lipstick, etc, with solvent recommended by Paint Manufacturer. Spot prime such surfaces. 2. Sand areas of existing sound paint if necessary for bonding of new paint system. Clean existing painted surfaces, sanded or not, with mild soap and water, or with tri -sodium phosphate (TSP). 3. Fill large holes with patching and small holes and cracks with spackle. 4. Apply one coat primer to scraped and sanded areas. 5. Apply one finish coat. Completely cover voids in masonry block but do not fill. END OF SECTION Interior Painted CMU - 2 - 099122 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTED GYPSUM BOARD, PLASTER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparing, priming, and finish painting new interior gypsum board and plaster surfaces as described in Contract Documents. 2. Preparing and painting existing interior gypsum board and plaster surfaces as described in Contract Documents: B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 2900: Priming new interior gypsum board surfaces to receive sheet wall covering system and texturing. 2. Section 09 9001: Common Painting Requirements. 3. Section 09 9413: Textured finishings. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. New Surfaces: 1. Use MPI(a) INT 9.26 Latex Finish system. B. All Other: 1. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 9.26 Latex Finish system. 2. Previously Finished Work: Use MPI(r) RIN 9.2B Latex Finish system. C. Finish Requirements: 1. New Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. 2. Deteriorated Existing Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. 3. Sound Existing Surfaces: MPI Custom Grade requirements. 1.3 SEQUENCING A. Properly clean and paint light cove interiors before installation of light fixtures. PART 2 -PRODUCTS I 2.1 MATERIALS A. Category Four Approved Products: Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. B. Primers 1. MPI Product 50. C. Finish Coats: 1. Color Quality Standard: ICI #A0069 Prism White. Interior Painted Gypsum Board, Plaster - 1 - 099123 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 2. 3. 4. 5. Gloss / Sheen Required: Gloss Level 5. MPI Product 141. Chapel Ceiling: a. Gloss / Sheen Required: b. MPI Product 53. Remaining Painted Surfaces: a. Gloss / Sheen Required: b. MPI Product 141. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION Gloss Level 1 or 2. Gloss Level 5. A. General: See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. B. New Surfaces: 1. Primer: Apply primer to be covered with other paint coats with roller only, or with spray gun and back -rolled. C. Existing Painted Surfaces: 1. Remove deteriorated existing paint down to sound substrate by scraping or sanding. Feather edges of existing paint by sanding to be smooth with adjacent surfaces. 2. Clean surface with mild soap and water, or with tri -sodium phosphate (TSP). Wash surfaces that have been defaced with marking pens, crayons, lipstick, etc, with solvent recommended by Paint Manufacturer. Spot prime such surfaces. 3. Spackle and tape cracks. Sand to smooth finish and spot prime. 4. Sand or chemically etch existing painted surface as required to prepare surface to accept new paint. 5. Re -clean surface. 6. Apply primer coat. 7. Apply finish coats. END OF SECTION Interior Painted Gypsum Board, Plaster - 2 - 099123 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 11 SECTION 09 9124 INTERIOR PAINTED METAL PART 1 -GENERAL t.Y1L4fTi"Mal A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparing and painting new interior metal surfaces as described in Contract Documents. 2. Preparing and painting existing interior metal surfaces as described in Contract Documents: B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 9001: Common Painting Requirements, 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Ferrous Metal: 1. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 5.1 B Waterborne Light Industrial Finish system. 2. Previously Finished Surfaces: Use MPI(r) RIN 5.1 B Waterborne Light Industrial Finish system. B. Galvanized Metal: 1. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 5.3J Latex Finish system 2. Previously Finished Surfaces: Use MPI(r) RIN 5.3AH Latex Finish system. C. Aluminum: 1. New Surfaces: Use MPI(a) INT 5.4E Waterborne Light Industrial Finish system. 2. Previously Finished Surfaces: Use MPI(r) REX 5.4E Light Industrial Finish system. D. Finish Requirements: 1. New Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. 2. Deteriorated Existing Surfaces: MPI Premium Grade finish requirements. 3. Sound Existing Surfaces: MPI Custom Grade requirements. 1.3 SEQUENCING A. Paint brackets furnished under Section 05 5871 before installation of bracket. B. Paint metal speaker grilles, which are to be painted to match ceiling, before attachment to speakers and before installation of sound system. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Color Quality Standard: To match existing. B. Gloss / Sheen Level Required: Gloss Level 5. C. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located. 2. Primers: Interior Painted Metal 1 - 099124 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design a. Ferrous Metal: MPI Product 107. b. Galvanized Metal: MPI Product 134. c. Aluminum: MPI Product 95. 3. Finish Coats: MPI Product 153. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. General: 1. See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. 2. Systems specified are in addition to prime coats furnished under other Sections. B. New Surfaces: Remove rust spots by sanding and immediately spot prime. If all traces of rust cannot be removed, apply rust blocker recommended by Paint Manufacturer before applying full primer coat. C. Existing Painted Surfaces: 1. Remove deteriorated existing paint down to sound substrate by scraping and sanding. Feather edges of existing paint by sanding to be smooth with adjacent surfaces. Spot prime bare metal surfaces immediately. 2. Remove rust spots by sanding and immediately spot prime. If all traces of rust cannot be removed, apply rust blocker recommended by Paint Manufacturer before applying full primer coat. 3. Clean existing sound painted surfaces as well as scraped and sanded existing painted surfaces as recommended by Paint Manufacturer. 4. Apply prime coat over entire surface to be painted. 5. Lightly sand entire surface. 6. Clean surface as recommended by Paint Manufacturer. 7. Apply finish coats. END OF SECTION Interior Painted Metal - 2 - 099124 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 09 9321 INTERIOR SEALED CONCRETE FLOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Seal concrete floors that are to be left exposed in finished building as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 9001: Common Painting And Coating Requirements. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Use MPI(a) INT 3.2F or 3.2G Finish systems. B. Use MPI Custom Grade requirements. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located. 2. MPI Products 99 or 104. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. See appropriate paragraphs of Section 09 9001. END OF SECTION Interior Sealed Concrete Floors - 1 - 099321 Project # 3885 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 09 9413 INTERIOR TEXTURED FINISHING A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and apply texturing on walls and ceilings as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 2900: Priming. 2. Section 09 9123: Finish painting. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Texturing: 1. To match existing. 2. Class Two Quality Standards: See Section 016200. a. ProForm Perfect Spray EM/HF by National Gypsum, Charlotte, NC www.nationalgypsum.com. b. Sheetrock Wall & Ceiling Texture by U S Gypsum Co, Chicago, IL www.usg.com. 17\iirII�lxl�llCih` 3.1 APPLICATION A. After gypsum board is taped, sanded, and primed, apply texture. END OF SECTION Interior Textured Finishing - 1 - 099413 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 09 9653 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Preparation of surfaces to receive elastomeric coatings as described in Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and apply elastomeric coating as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 9213: Joint Sealants. 2. Section 09 9001: Common Painting and Coating Requirements. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM D 412-98a, 'Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension.' 2. ASTM E 96-00, 'Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.' 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Use MPI(a) EXT 4.2D Elastomeric Finish system for new work. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Resistant to wind driven rain when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. 2. Meet elongation and tensile strength requirements (at 25 deg C 280 PSI / 380 percent) when tested in accordance ASTM D 412. 3. Vapor Transmission: 3.4 perms. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's data sheets including but not limited to: a. Installation procedures. b. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). c. Maintenance procedures and instructions. d. Color samples. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED SYSTEMS A. Gloss / Sheen Level Required: Flat. B. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. 1. Products listed in edition of MPI Approved Product List current at time of bidding and later are approved, providing they meet VOC requirements in force where Project is located. 2. MPI Product 113. Elastomeric Coatings 1 - 099653 Project # 3885 PART 3 - EXECUTION 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 3.1 PREPARATION A. Scrape, wire brush, sand, etc to remove old paint, oil, grease, dirt, and other deleterious material. Leave surfaces as clean as possible. B. Remove existing calking between wood frame and glass. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Brush apply one coat of specified primer. B. Calk cracks in wood larger than 1116 inch and between wood and glass with sealant specified under Section 07 9213. C. Brush apply first coat and allow to dry for minimum of 12 hours. D. Brush apply second coat. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean up debris related to work of this Section and remove from Project site. Leave window frames and glass in clean, neat condition. END OF SECTION Elastomeric Coatings - 2 - 099653 DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES 101000 INFORMATION SPECIALTIES 10 149$ MISCELLANEOUS INTERIOR SIGNAGE 102000 SAFETY SPECIALTIES 104400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents - 1 - Document 10 0000 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 101495 MISCELLANEOUS INTERIOR SIGNAGE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install interior signs as described in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Schedule showing signs required, location, and text. B. Samples: Provide sample sign for comparison with existing signs. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Signs: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Provide required signs matching existing in color, lettering style, size, etc, as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install signs square and plumb. Match mounting method and location of existing signs. END OF SECTION Miscellaneous Interior Signage - 1 - 101495 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 10 4400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL Inn *YlL7ihTdA:Y1 A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Wall hung extinguishers and brackets. 2. Extinguishers with cabinets. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's literature or cut sheets for cabinets and extinguishers. 2. Maintenance instructions for extinguishers. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Fire extinguishers shall be inspected and have annual inspection tag attached before Substantial Completion. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide Manufacturer's standard, written warranty on fire extinguisher. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Ten pound dry chemical ABC stored pressurized type equipped with pressure gauge and which does not need recharging except after use. 2. Instructions for repairs, maintenance, and recharging shall be attached. 3. Unit shall be tested and approved by UL and have minimum 4A:60-B:C UL rating. UL rating shall appear on extinguisher labels and be attached to and a part of fire extinguisher units. 4. Category Four Approved Manufacturers: a. Amerex Corp b. Ansul Incorporated c. Seton Inc. d. Extinguishers private -labeled by manufacturers approved above are approved, with appropriate documentation. B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: 1. Two-piece, semi -recessed or flush type depending on wall thickness, and have white baked enameled steel tubs with white baked enamel return trim and doors, DSA full break -glass, and cylinder locks. 2. Supply each cabinet with one fire extinguisher specified above. 3. Performance Standard: Architectural Series, Model 2409-132 by Larsen's. 4. Performance Standard: Ambassador 1017 by J L Industries. 5. Type One Acceptable Manufacturers: Fire Protection Specialties - 1 - 104400 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design a. J L Industries. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. c. Modern Metal Products / Technico. d. Potter -Roemer. e. Samson. f. Seton Inc, Richmond Hill, ON. g. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200. C. Wall -Mounted Brackets: 1. Performance Standard: No. 846 by Larsen's. 2. Type Three Acceptable Products: a. J L Industries. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. c. Modern Metal Products / Technico. d. Potter -Roemer. e. Samson. f. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Contact Information: 1. Amerex Corp, Trussville, AL www.amerex-fire.com. 2. Ansul Incorporated, Marinette, WI www.ansul.com. 3. J L Industries, Bloomington, MN www.jlindustries.com. 4. Larsen's Manufacturing Co, Minneapolis, MN www.larsensmfg.com. 5. Modern Metal Products/ Technico, Owatonna, MN www.modern-metal.com. 6. National Fire Equipment Ltd, Scarborough, ON www.nationalfire.com. 7. Potter -Roemer, Cerritos, CA www.potterroemer.com. 8. Samson Products Inc, City of Commerce, CA www.samsonproducts.com. 9. Seton Inc, Richmond Hill, ON (905) 764-1122. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Securely mount cabinets and hangers plumb with wall surfaces. B. Trim for cabinets shall be neat in appearance. END OF SECTION Fire Protection Specialties - 2 - 104400 '�i X' Project # 3885 6-25-2010 DIVISION 22: PLUMBING 220000 PLUMBING 22 0501 COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 0502 DEMOLITION AND REPAIR 22 0503 PIPE, PIPE FITTINGS, PIPE HANGERS & VALVES 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPES AND EQUIPMENT 22 0703 MECHANICAL INSULATION AND FIRE STOPPING 22 0710 POTABLE WATER PIPE INSULATION 22 0800 FIRE STOPPING 221000 PLUMBING PIPING AND VALVES 22 1116 POTABLE WATER PIPING SYSTEMS 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 4001 PLUMBING FIXTURES Austin Welding Lab Design Table of Contents - 1 - Division 22 Project # 3885 Project 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design DIVISION 22 PLUMBING SECTION 22 0501 COMMON PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for completion of work as described in Contract Documents. B. It is the intent of these specifications that the systems specified herein are to be complete and operational before being turned over to the owner. During the bidding process, the contractor is to ask questions or call to the engineer's attention any items that are not shown or may be required to make the system complete and operational. Once the project is bid and the contractor has accepted the contract, it is his responsibility to furnish and install all equipment and parts necessary to provide a complete and operational system without additional cost to the owner. C. Finnish and install fire stopping materials to seal penetrations through fire rated structures and draft stops. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Substitutions: By specific designation and description, standards are established for specialties and equipment. Other makes of specialties and equipment of equal quality will be considered provided such proposed substitutions are submitted to the Architect for his approval, complete with specification data showing how it meets the specifications, at least 5 working days prior to bid opening. A list of approved substitutions will be published as an addendum. 1. Submit a single copy of Manufacturer's catalog data including Manufacturer's complete specification for each proposed substitution. 2. The Architect or Engineer is to be the sole judge as to the quality of any material offered as an equal. B. Product Data, Shop Drawings: Within 30 days after award of contract, submit 10 sets of Manufacturer's catalog data for each manufactured item. 1. Literature shall include enough information to show complete compliance with Contract Document requirements. 2. Mark literature to indicate specific item with applicable data underlined. 3. Information shall include but not be limited to capacities, ratings, type of material used, guarantee, and such dimensions as are necessary to check space requirements. 4. When accepted, submittal shall be an addition to Contract Documents and shall be in equal force. No variation shall be permitted. 5. Even though the submittals have been accepted by the Engineer, it does not relieve the contractor from meeting all of the requirements of the plans and specifications and providing a complete and operational system. C. Drawings of Record: One complete sets of blue line mechanical drawings shall be provided for the purpose of showing a complete picture of the work as actually installed. I. These drawings shall serve as work progress report sheets. Contractor shall make notations neat and legible therein daily as the work proceeds. 2. The drawings shall be kept at the job at a location designated by the Mechanical Engineer. Common Plumbing Requirements - 1 - 220501 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 3. At completion of the project these "as -built" drawings shall be signed by the Contractor, dated, and returned to the Architect. D. Operating Instructions and Service Manual: The Mechanical Contractor shall prepare 2 copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual for all mechanical systems and equipment used in this project. Manuals shall be bound in hard -backed binders and the front cover and spine of each binder shall indicate the name and location of the project. Use plastic tab indexes for all sections. Provide a section for each different type of equipment item. The following items shall be included in the manual, together with any other pertinent data. This list is not complete and is to be used as a guide. 1. Provide a master index at the beginning of the manual showing all items included. 2. The first section of the manual shall contain: a. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Mechanical Engineer, Electrical Engineer, General Contractor, Plumbing Contractor, Sheet Metal Contractor, and Temperature Control Contractor. b. List of Suppliers which shall include a complete list of each piece of equipment used with the name, address, and telephone number of vendor. C. General Description of Systems including — 1) Location of all major equipment 2) Description of the various mechanical systems 3) Description of operation and control of the mechanical systems 4) Suggested maintenance schedule d. Copy of contractor's written warranty 3. Provide a copy of approved submittal literature for each piece of equipment. 4. Provide maintenance and operation literature published by the manufacturer for each piece of equipment which includes: oiling, lubrication and greasing data; belt sizes, types and lengths; wiring diagrams; step-by-step procedure to follow in putting each piece of mechanical equipment in operation. 5. Include parts numbers of all replaceable items. 6. Provide control diagram and operation sequence, along with labeling of control piping and instruments to match diagram. 7. Include a valve chart indicating valve locations. 8. Include air balance and/or water balance reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 1. Perform work in accordance with applicable provisions of local and state Plumbing Code, Gas Ordinances, and adoptions thereof. Provide materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations, and ordinances. 2. In case of differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, utility company regulations, and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Promptly notify Architect in writing of such differences. B. Applicable Specifications: Referenced specifications, standards, and publications shall be of the issues in effect on date of Advertisement for Bid. 1. "Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Guide" published by the American Society of Heating — and Air Conditioning Engineers. 2. "Engineering Standards" published by the Heating, Piping, and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. 3. "2006 International Building Code", "2006 International Mechanical Code", and "2006 International Fire Code" as published by the International Conference of Building Officials. 4. 2003 Uniform Plumbing Code as published by the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials. 5. "National Electrical Code" as published by the National Fire Protection Association. 6. "2006 International Energy Conservation Code ". C. Identification: Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall be in place when Project is turned over to Owner. Common Plumbing Requirements - 2 - 220501 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 1.5 INSPECTIONS AND PERMITS A. Pay for permits, fees, or charges for inspection or other services. Local and state codes and ordinances must be properly executed without expense to Owner and are considered as minimum requirements. Local and state codes and ordinances do not relieve the Contractor from work shown that exceeds minimum requirements. 1.6 ADDITIONAL WORK: A. Design is based on equipment as described in the drawing equipment schedule. Any change in foundation bases, electrical wiring, conduit connections, piping, controls and openings required by alternate equipment submitted and approved shall be paid for by this division. All work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the applicable sections. PART 2 - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Site Inspection: 1. Examine premises and understand the conditions which may affect performance of work of this Division before submitting proposals for this work. 2. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to failure to examine site conditions. B. Drawings 1. Mechanical drawings show general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc, and do not attempt to show complete details of building construction which affect installation. This Contractor shall refer to architectural, structural, and electrical drawings for additional building detail which affect installation of his work. a. Follow mechanical drawings as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit. b. No extra payments will be allowed where piping and/or ductwork must be offset to avoid other work or where minor changes are necessary to facilitate installation. C. Everything shown on the mechanical drawings shall be the responsibility of Mechanical Contractor unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. Consider architectural and structural drawings part of this work insofar as these drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. These drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings. 3. Because of small scale of mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required to meet conditions. Do not scale drawings for locations of equipment or piping. Refer to large scale dimensioned drawings for exact locations. C. Insure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment of size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. 1. If approval is received to use other than specified items, responsibility for specified capacities and insuring that items to be furnished will fit space available lies with this Division. 2. If non-specified equipment is used and it will not fit job site conditions, this Contractor assumes responsibility for replacement with items named in Contract Documents. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or trusses. Common Plumbing Requirements - 3 - 220501 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 1. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials. 2. Each Section of this Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing of work of other Sections required because of its fault, error, tardiness, or because of damage done by it. 3. Cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavements, sidewalks, roads, and curbs to permit installation of work of this Division is responsibility of Section installing work. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, unions, traps, starters, motors, control components, and to clear openings of doors and access panels. 3.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS: A. Provide storage space for storage of materials and assume complete responsibility for losses due to any cause whatsoever. Storage shall not interfere with traffic conditions in any public thoroughfare. B. Protect completed work, work underway, and materials against loss or damage. C. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover fixtures and equipment and protect against dirt, or injury caused by water, chemical, or mechanical accident. 3.5 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Perform necessary excavation of whatever substance encountered for proper laying of all pipes and underground ducts. I. Excavated materials not required for fill shall be removed from site as directed by Engineer. 2. Excavation shall be carried low enough to allow a minimum coverage over underground piping of 5'-0" or to be below local frost level. 3. Excess excavation below required level shall be backfilled at Contractor's expense with earth, sand, or gravel as directed by Engineer. Tamp ground thoroughly. 4. Ground adjacent to all excavations shall be graded to prevent water running into excavated areas. B. Backfill pipe trenches and allow for settlement. 1. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted to same density as surrounding undisturbed earth. 2. Cinders shall not be used in backfilling where steel or iron pipe is used. 3. No backfilling shall be done until installation has been approved by the Engineer. 3.6 COOPERATION A. Cooperate with other crafts in coordination of work. Promptly respond when notified that construction is ready for installation of work under Division 22. Contractor will be held responsible for any delays which might be caused by his negligence or failure to cooperate with the other Contractors or crafts. 3.7 SUPERVISION A. Provide a competent superintendent in charge of the work at all times. Anyone found incompetent shall be removed at once and replaced by someone satisfactory, when requested by the Architect. 3.8 INSTALLATION CHECK: A. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer or supplier of each item of equipment indicated in the equipment schedule shall visit the project to inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. In each case, the equipment supplier's representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation. The equipment supplier's representative shall revisit the project as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation is satisfactory to the Engineer. Common Plumbing Requirements - 4 - 220501 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design B. Each equipment supplier's representative shall furnish to the Owner, through the Engineer, a written report certifying the following: 1. Equipment has been properly installed and lubricated. 2. Equipment is in accurate alignment. 3. Equipment is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts. 4. Equipment has been operated under full load conditions. 5. Equipment operated satisfactorily. C. All costs for this installation check shall be included in the prices quoted by equipment suppliers. 3.9 CLEANING EQUIPMENT AND PREMISES A. Properly lubricate equipment before Owner's acceptance. B. Clean exposed piping, ductwork, equipment, and fixtures. Repair damaged finishes and leave everything in working order. C. Remove stickers from fixtures and adjust flush valves. D. At date of Substantial Completion, air filters shall be new, clean, and approved by Owner's representative. E. Trap elements shall be removed during cleaning and flushing period. Replace trap elements and adjust after cleaning and flushing period. 3.10 TESTS A. No piping work, fixtures, or equipment shall be concealed or covered until they have been inspected and approved by the inspector. Notify inspector when the work is ready for inspection. B. All work shall be completely installed, tested as required by Contract Documents and the city and county ordinances and shall be leak -tight before the inspection is requested. C. Tests shall be repeated to the satisfaction of those making the inspections. D. Water piping shall be flushed out, tested at 100 psi and left under pressure of supply main or a minimum of 40 psi for the balance of the construction period. 3.11 WARRANTEE A. Contractor shall guarantee work under Division 22 to be free from inherent defects for a period of one year from acceptance. I. Contractor shall repair, revise or replace any and all such leaks, failure or inoperativeness due to defective work, materials, or parts free of charge for a period of one year from final acceptance, provided such defect is not due to carelessness in operation or maintenance. 2. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish all refrigeration emergency repairs, emergency service and all refrigerant required due to defective workmanship, materials, or parts for a period of one year from final acceptance at no cost to the Owner, provided such repairs, service and refrigerant are not caused by lack of proper operation and maintenance. B. In addition to warrantee specified in General Conditions, heating, cooling, and plumbing systems are to be free from noise in operation that may develop from failure to construct system in accordance with Contract Documents. 3.12 SYSTEM START-UP, OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Off -Season Start-up 1. If Substantial Completion inspection occurs during heating season, schedule spring start-up of cooling systems. If inspection occurs during cooling season, schedule autumn start-up for heating systems. Common Plumbing Requirements - 5 - 220501 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 2. Notify Owner 7 days minimum before scheduled start-up. 3. Time will be allowed to completely service, test, check, and off-season start systems. During allowed time, train Owner's representatives in operation and maintenance of system. 4. At end of off-season start-up, furnish Owner with letter confirming that above work has been satisfactorily completed. B. Owner's Instructions I. Instruct building maintenance personnel and Owner Representative in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing Operation & Maintenance Manual when so doing. 2. Minimum instruction periods shall be as follows — a. Plumbing - Four hours. 3. Instruction periods shall occur after Substantial Completion inspection when systems are properly working and before final payment is made. 4. None of these instructional periods shall overlap another. END OF SECTION Common Plumbing Requirements - 6 - 220501 Project # 3885 PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 6-25-2010 SECTION 22 0502 DEMOLITION AND REPAIR Austin Welding Lab Design A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 22 0501 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Under this section remove obsolete piping and mechanical equipment and relocate, reconnect or replace existing piping affected by demolition or new construction. Remove concealed piping abandoned due to demolition or new construction, or cap piping flush with existing surfaces. 1.3 DRAWINGS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS A. All relocations, reconnections and removals are not necessarily indicated on the drawings. As such, the Contractor shall make adequate allowance in his proposal for this work as no extra charges will be allowed for these items. PART 2 - NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS A. Where existing piping must remain in service to supply occupied areas during construction, provide temporary piping, connections, and equipment to maintain service to such areas. All shall be performed in a neat and safe manner to prevent injury to the building or its occupants. 3.2 EXISTING TO BE ABANDONED A. All Required drilling, cutting, block-outs and demolition work required for the removal and/or installation of the mechanical system is the responsibility of this Contractor. B. No joists, beams, girders, trusses or columns shall be cut by any Contractor without written permission from the Architect. C. The patching, repair, and finishing to existing or new surfaces is the responsibility of this Contractor, unless specifically called for under sections of specifications covering these materials. D. Disconnect all equipment that is to be removed or relocated. Relocate any existing equipment that obstructs new construction. 3.3 EXISTING TO REMAIN IN USE A. Where affected by demolition or new construction, relocate, replace, extend, or repair piping and equipment to allow continued use of same. Use methods and materials as specified for new construction. 3.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT REMOVED A. All obsolete materials, piping, and equipment shall become the property of the Contractor and be removed from the site promptly. END OF SECTION 22 0502 Demolition and Repair - 1 - 220502 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 22 0503 i PIPE, PIPE FITTINGS, PIPE HANGERS & VALVES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. SUMMARY 1.2 SUMMARY A. General piping and valve materials and installation procedures for all piping systems. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacture: 1. Use domestic made valves, pipe and pipe fittings. General: Support components shall conform to Manufacturer's Standardization Society Specification SP - 58. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES A. Ball Valves 1. 2" and smaller for domestic water service: a. Milwaukee BA -100, bronze, screwed, 600# WOG ball valve with Teflon seats b. Victaulic S/722. 2. 2" and smaller for heating hot water service: a. Milwaukee BA -100, bronze, screwed, 600# WOG ball valve with Teflon seats b. Victaulic S/722. 3. 2%" and larger - 3 piece full port, bronze, flanged 400# WOG with seats rated for temperature service. 4. Ball valves shall be used where ever possible. B. Use ball valves or butterfly valves everywhere unless noted otherwise. C. Approved Manufacturers 1. Crane 2. Nibco 3. Hammond 4. Stockham 5. Milwaukee 6. Victaulic 2.2 PIPE A. Exposed waste, vent and water piping connections to fixtures shall be chrome plated. B. Potable Hot and Cold Water Piping: Above slab shall be Type "L" copper tubing with wrought copper solder fittings. Solder with Silvaloy, Stream line 122, Phos -copper or approved equal 95/5 solder. Below slab shall be Type "K" copper with wrought copper sweat fittings. Bed piping in sandfill all around. Solder with Silvaloy and insulate. Provide dielectric waterways Style #47 between ferrous and non- ferrous piping. Pipe, Pipe Fittings, Pipe Hangers & Valves - 1 - 220503 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design C. Gas Piping: Shall be Schedule 40-A-120 black steel pipe with black banded malleable iron fittings. Use wrapped pipe underground. D. Argon and CO2 Piping: 40-A-120 black steel pipe with black banded 300 Ib. malleable iron fittings and coupling. 2.3 PIPE HANGERS A. Adjustable, malleable iron clevis type of a diameter adequate to support pipe size. B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. B -Line Systems Fig. B3100 2. Grinnell No. 260 3. Kin -Line 455 4. Superstrut CL -710 2.4 INSULATING COUPLINGS A. Suitable for at least 175 PSIG WP at 250 deg F. B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Central Plastics Co 2. Victaulic Co 3. Watts Regulator Co 2.5 SLEEVES A. Sleeves shall be standard weight galvanized iron pipe, Schedule 40 PVC, or 14 gauge galvanized sheet metal two sizes larger than pipe or insulation. B. Steel or heavy steel metal of the telescoping type of a size to accommodate pipe and covering wherever it passes through floors, walls, or ceilings. 2.6 INTERMEDIATE ATTACHMENTS A. Continuous threaded rod may be used wherever possible. B. No chain, wire, or perforated strap shall be used. 2.7 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A. Brass chrome plated 2.8 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS - Grinnell and Fee/Mason A. Concrete Inserts: Grinnell Fig. 282 B. Pipe Hanger Flange: Grinnell Fig. 163 C. Vertical Pipe: Grinnell Fig. 261 or equal. D. Cast Iron Pipe: Grinnell Fig. 260 clevis hanger or equal E. Pipe Attachments for steel pipe with V or less of.insulation: 1. Grinnell Fig. 108 ring 2. Grinnell Fig. 114 turnbuckle adjuster 3. Or equal Pipe, Pipe Fittings, Pipe Hangers & Valves - 2 - 220503 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install complete system of piping, valved as indicated or as necessary to completely control entire apparatus. Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and connections. Piping may have to be offset, lowered, or raised as required or directed at site. This does not relieve this Contractor from responsibility for proper erection of systems of piping in every respect. B. Properly support piping and make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage. 1. Cut piping accurately for fabrication to measurements established at site and work into place without springing or forcing. 2. Do not use pipe hooks, chains, or perforated metal for pipe support. 3. Remove burr and cutting slag from pipes. 4. Make changes in direction with proper fittings. 5. Insulate hangers for copper pipe from piping by means of at least two layers of Scotch 33 plastic tape. 6. Support piping at 8 feet on center maximum for pipe 1-1/4 inches or larger and 6 feet on center maximum for pipe one inch or less. Provide support at each elbow. Install additional support as required. 7. Suspend piping from roof trusses or clamp to vertical walls using Unistrut and clamps (except underground pipe). Laying of piping on any building member is not allowed. C. Arrange piping to not interfere with removal of other equipment, ducts, or devices, or block access to doors, windows, or access openings. Provide accessible, ground joint unions in piping at connections to equipment. D. Make connections of dissimilar metals with insulating couplings. E. Provide sleeves around pipes passing through floors, walls, partitions, or structural members. 1. Seal sleeves with plastic or other acceptable material. 2. Do not place sleeves around soil, waste, vent, or roof drain lines passing through concrete floors on grade. F. Cap or plug open ends of pipes and equipment to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of system. Do not use plugs of rags, wool, cotton waste, or similar materials. G. Install piping systems so they may be easily drained. 3.2 HORIZONTAL PIPING INSTALLATION A. Locate hangers, supports, and anchors near or at changes in piping direction and concentrated loads. B. Provide for vertical adjustment to maintain pitch required for proper drainage. C. Allow for expansion and contraction of the piping. 3.3 PIPE SLEEVES AND INSERTS A. Set sleeves before concrete is poured or floors finished. B. Inserts for units should be placed in the concrete or masonry during construction to avoid cutting of finished work. When and if cutting becomes necessary, it must be done in accordance with the cutting and patching specifications. 3.4 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A. Install on all pipes passing through floors, partitions, and ceilings. Pipe, Pipe Fittings, Pipe Hangers & Valves - 3 - 220503 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 3.5 UNIONS AND CONNECTIONS A. Install malleable groundjoint unions in hot and cold water piping throughout the system so that any portion can be taken down for repairs or inspections without injury to same or covering. B. Running threads or long screws will not be permitted in jointing any pipe. C. Provide dielectric waterways Style #47 between ferrous and non-ferrous metals. 3.6 FIRE STOPPING A. Fire stop all penetrations of fire walls, fire barriers, fire petitions, and other fire rated walls and ceilings and floors as per IBC Section 711. See Specification 22 0800. END OF SECTION 22 0503 Pipe, Pipe Fittings, Pipe Hangers & Valves - 4 - 220503 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 SECTION 22 0553 Austin Welding Lab Design IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPES AND EQUIPMENT PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, and Section 15055 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install identification of equipment and piping as described in Contract Documents. B. Mechanical Contractor shall touch-up equipment where factory paint has been damaged. Repaint entire item where more than 20 percent of the surface is involved. C. Primary painting of walls, ceilings, ductwork, piping and plenums is covered in the general painting section of these Contract Documents. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT A. Benjamin Moore Impervo or equivalent by Paint Manufacturer approved in Section 09 900. B. Use appropriate primer. 2.2 LABELS A. Black Formica with white reveal on engraving. 2.3 CODED BANDS A. Using colored bands and arrows to indicate supply and return, with colored reflective tape, color code all piping installed in this contract at not more than 20 -foot intervals, at equipment, at walls, etc., in accordance with ANSI Standards. B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Seton 2. Craftmark 2.4 PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. In addition to the colored bands, stencil with black paint in 1/2 inch high letters a symbol and directional arrow for all fluids handled or use Seaton coded and colored pipe markers and arrows to meet ANSI Standards. 2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide an engraved plastic plate for each piece of equipment stating the name of the item, symbol number, area served, and capacity. Label all control components with plastic embossed mechanically attached labels. Sample: Supply Fan SF -1 -North Classrooms 10,000 CFM @ 2.5" ID for Plumbing Pipes and Equipment - 1 - 220553 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 2.6 VALVE IDENTIFICATION r - A. Make a list of and tag all valves installed in this work. I. Valve tags shall be of brass, not less than I"x2" size, hung with brass chains. 2. Tag shall indicate plumbing or heating service. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Engraved Plates: 1. Identify thermostats and control panels in mechanical rooms, furnaces, boilers and hat water � heating specialties, duct furnaces, air handling units, electric duct heaters, and condensing units with following data engraved and fastened to equipment with screws - - a. Equipment mark noted on Drawings (i.e., SF -l) b. Area served (i.e., North Classrooms) C. Capacity (10,000 CFM @ 2.5) B. Stenciling: !! 1. Locate identifying legends and directional arrows at following points on each piping system - a. Adjacent to each item of equipment and special fitting. b. At point of entry and exit where piping goes through wall. C. On each riser and junction. d. Every 50 feet on long continuous lines. 2. Potable Hot & Cold Water Piping Identification - a. Identification of water piping above ceilings is not required. b. Identify potable hot and cold water piping below ceilings with stenciled letters "HW" and "CW" respectively. c. Letters shall be one inch high. Provide "Direction of Flow" arrow at each stencil. d. Paint color shall be black or white as required for maximum contrast with pipe color. 3. Gas, & Valve Identification - a. Identify specific pipe contents by stenciling pipe with written legend and placing of arrows to indicate direction of flow. C. Painting: J 1. Background Color - Provide by continuous painting of piping. Symbol Name Color AG ARGON Orange CO, Carbon Dioxide Orange MG Mixed Gas Orange HW Potable Hot Water Green CW Potable Cold Water Green f 2. Identification stenciling and flow arrows shall be following colors for proper contrast: ! Arrows & ID Stenciline Color Shade of Pipe White Red, Grays, & black Black Yellows, Oranges, Greens, & White END OF SECTION 22 0553 ID for Plumbing Pipes and Equipment - 2 - 220553 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 22 0703 MECHANICAL INSULATION AND FIRE STOPPING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 22 05 01 apply to this Section. A. Furnish and install mechanical insulation and fire stopping as described in Contract Documents including but not limited to the following: 1. Cold Water Piping Insulation 2. Hot Water Piping Insulation (Domestic) 3. Fire Stopping 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing and adhesive used to adhere facing or jacket to insulation) fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by Procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding: Flame Spread of 25 and Smoke Developed of 50. Insulation Contractor shall certify in writing, prior to installation, that all products to be used will meet the above criteria. C. Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics, cements, and tapes, for fittings shall have the same component ratings as listed above. D. Products, or their shipping cartons, shall bear a label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed above requirements. E. Any treatment ofjacket or facings to impart flame and smoke safety shall be permanent. F. The use of water-soluble treatments is prohibited. END OF SECTION 22 0703 Mechanical Insulation and Fire Stopping - 1 - 220703 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 22 0710 POTABLE WATER PIPE INSULATION PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. SUMMARY 1.2 SUMMARY A. Famish and install insulation on above ground hot and cold water lines, fittings, valves, pump bodies, flanges, and accessories as described in Contract Documents. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION A. One inch thick snap -on glass fiber pipe insulation. B. Heavy density pipe insulation with factory vaporjacket equal to Fiberglass ASJ may be used. C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. CTM 2. Manville 3. Owens -Coming 4. Knauf 2.2 PVC FITTING, VALVE, & ACCESSORY COVERS A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Knauf 2. Zeston PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Piping 1. Apply insulation to clean, dry piping with joints tightly butted. 2. Adhere "factory applied vapor barrierjacket lap" smoothly and securely at longitudinal laps with a white vapor barrier adhesive. 3. Adhere 3 inch wide self-sealing buttjoint strips over end joints. B. Fittings, Valves, & Accessories: L Insulate with same type and thickness of insulation as pipe, with ends of insulation tucked snugly into throat of fitting and edges adjacent to pipe insulation tufted and tucked in. 2. Cover insulation with one piece fitting cover secured by stapling or taping ends to adjacent pipe covering. C. Pipe Hangers: 1. Do not allow pipes to come in contact with hangers. 2. Provide 16 ga x 6 inch long galvanized shields at each pipe hanger to protect pipe insulation from crushing by clevis hanger. END OF SECTION 22 0710 Potable Water Pipe Insulation - 1 - 220710 Project # 3885 PARTI- GENERAL 11111=1211 W.7411 6-25-2010 SECTION 22 0800 FIRE STOPPING Austin Welding Lab Design A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 22 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install fire stopping as described in Contract Documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire stopping material shall meet ASTM E814, E84 and be UL listed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Material shall be flexible, long lasting, intumescent acrylic seal to accommodate vibration and building movement. B. Caulk simple penetrations with gaps of 1/4" or less with: 1. Dow Coming Fire Stop Sealant 2. Pensil300 C. Caulk multiple penetrations and/or penetrations with gaps in excess of 1/4" with: 1. Dow Coming Fire Stop Foam 2. Pensil200 3. IPC flame safe FS -1900 4. Tremco "Tremstop IA" PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions explicitly. B. Seal penetrations of ductwork, piping, and other mechanical equipment through one-hour and two-hour rated partitions as shown on Architectural and Mechanical Drawings. C. Install fire stopping material on clean surfaces to assure adherence. END OF SECTION 22 0800 Fire Stopping - 1 - 220800 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 22 1116 POTABLE WATER PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. SUMMARY 1.2 SUMMARY A. Famish and install potable water piping complete with necessary valves, connections, and accessories inside building and connect with outside utility lines 5 feet from building perimeter. B. Perform excavating and backfilling required by work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control: 1. Submit written report of sterilization test to Architect. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE A. Type K copper for piping underground or beneath concrete slab. 3/4 inch minimum under slabs. B. Type L hard drawn copper for above ground applications. 2.2 FITTINGS A. Wrought copper. 2.3 CONNECTIONS: A. Sweat copper type with 95/5 or 96/4 Tin -Antimony solder. Victaulic copper connection system with "FS" flush -seal gasket and zero -flex couplings. B. Joints under slabs, if allowed by local codes, shall be brazed. 2.4 BALL VALVES A. Use ball valves exclusively unless otherwise specified. Ball valves shall be by single manufacturer from approved list below. Valves shall be for 150 PSI SWP. B. Approved Manufacturers: I. Nibco-Scott T595 or 5595 or equal by 2. ConBraCo (Apollo) 3. Crane 4. Hammond 5. Jenkins 6. Ohio Brass 7. Stockham 8. Walworth 9. Watts Potable Water Piping Systems - 1 - 221116 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 10. Victaulic PART 3 -EXECUTION K1� �1.68w IM111J.711114MI A. Install piping under slabs without joints where possible. B. Locate cold water lines a minimum of 6 inches from hot water line. C. Run main water pipe and branches to all fixtures. D. Size piping as shown. E. Run piping direct and concealed from view, unless otherwise shown. F. Grade horizontal runs to allow for drainage. G. Provide sufficient drains to draw water from entire domestic water system and sections thereof where cutoffs are shown. N. Furnish and install complete hot and/or cold water to all fixtures as shown on drawings. 1. Run lines parallel to each other and parallel with the lines of the building. J. Cut pipes accurately to required measurements and work into place without springing or forcing. K. Provide for expansion and contraction of piping. L. Paint exposed threads on underground piping one coat asphaltum varnish. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Before pipes are covered, test systems in presence of Architect at 100 psi hydrostatic pressure for two hours and show no leaks. B. Sterilize potable water system with solution containing 250 parts per million minimum of available chlorine. Introduce chlorinating materials into system in manner approved by Architect. Allow sterilization solution to remain for 24 hours and open and close valves and faucets several times during that time. C. After sterilization, flush solution from system with clean water until residual chlorine content is less than 0.2 parts per million. D. Water system will not be accepted until negative bacteriological test is made on water taken from system. Repeat dosing as necessary until such negative test is accomplished. END OF SECTION 22 1116 Potable Water Piping Systems - 2 - 221116 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 22 4001 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. SUMMARY 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures as described in Contract Documents. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Before fixtures are ordered, the Contractor shall submit a complete list of plumbing fixtures, giving the catalog number, cut and make, for approval. Fixtures shall not be ordered until this list is approved. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Interior exposed pipe, valves, and fixture trim shall be chrome plated. B. Do not use flexible water piping. C. Flow Control Fittings: 1. Vandal proof type and fit faucet spout of fixture used. Flow shall be controlled as required by local codes. D. Furnish and install the necessary plumbing fixtures in quantity as shown on plans. Provide all necessary valves, chrome plated 17 gauge or cast "P" traps, stops with risers, fittings, and accessories to make the job complete with the fixtures specified on the drawings. Exposed stops to be equal to Brasscraft with compression inlet, chrome plated nipples, cross handles, '/C turn ball valves and flexible risers. E. Stainless steel sink manufacturers shall be Elkay or Just. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures including traps and accessories with accessible stop or control valve in each hot and cold water branch supply line. B. Make fixture floor connections with approved brand of cast iron floor flange, soldered or calked securely to waste pipe. C. Make joints between fixtures and floor flanges tight with approved fixture setting compound or gaskets. D. Caulk between fixtures and wall and floor with white butyl rubber non-absorbent caulking compound. Point edges. E. Cleanouts: Provide and set full size cleanouts at foot of each riser, and ends of branches from toilets, at points where a change of direction occurs, on exposed and accessible traps, at points where required to Plumbing Fixtures - 1 - 224001 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design remove rust accumulation or other obstructions and as shown on plans. Set screw cap in cleanout with graphite paste. Location of all cleanouts subject to approval of inspector. Traps: Install "P" traps in branch lines from floor drains or where required. Traps installed in connection with threaded pipe shall be recess drainage pattern. Traps installed in connection with cast iron pipe shall be of the same quality and grade as the pipe. Traps installed in connection with fixtures shall have a seal of not less than 2" nor more than 4". Exposed traps shall be chrome plated cast brass or chrome plated 17 gauge tubular type. Provide trap primers as required by Code. 3.2 FIXTURE INSTALLATION A. Provide stop valves and 18" minimum air chambers on all water connections to fixtures. Furnish and install wall carriers for wall mounted fixtures, wood backing, where necessary, to be installed by General Contractor at the direction of this Contractor. Provide exact locations, including proper mounting heights, obtained from details on drawings and from manufacturer's specifications. Provide hudee rims for countertop installations. B. Interior exposed pipe, valves, and fixtures trim shall be chrome plated. C. Complete installation of each fixture including trap and accessories with accessible stop or control valve in each hot and cold water branch supply line. Make fixture floor connections with approved brand of cast iron floor flange, soldered or caulked securely to waste pipe. Make joint between fixture and floor flange tight with approved fixture setting compound or gaskets. D. Polish chrome finish at completion of project. E. Caulk between fixtures and wall and floor with white butyl rubber non-absorbent caulking compound. Paint all edges. Install fixtures and fittings as per local codes and manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 22 400 END OF DIVISION 22 Plumbing Fixtures - 2 - 224001 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 DIVISION 23: HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 230000 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING 23 0501 COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS 23 0502 DEMOLITION AND REPAIR 23 0514 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 0715 HOT WATER HEATING & RETURN PIPING INSULATION 23 0800 FIRE STOPPING 232000 HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING 233000 HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 23 3114 LOW-PRESSURE STEEL DUCTWORK 23 3115 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES 23 3182 HIGH-PRESSURE DUCT 23 3713 AIR OUTLETS & INLETS Austin Welding Lab Design f Table Of Contents - 1 - Division 23 Project # 3885 PARTI-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 6-25-2010 DIVISION 23 - HVAC SECTION 23 0501 COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS Austin Welding Lab Design A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for completion of work as described in Contract Documents. B. It is the intent of these specifications that the systems specified herein are to be complete and operational before being turned over to the owner. During the bidding process, the contractor is to ask questions or call to the engineer's attention any items that are not shown or may be required to make the system complete and operational. Once the project is bid and the contractor has accepted the contract, it is his responsibility to furnish and install all equipment and parts necessary to provide a complete and operational system without additional cost to the owner. C. Furnish and install fire stopping materials to seal penetrations through fire rated structures and draft stops. D. Includes But Not Limited To: I. General procedures and requirements for HVAC. E. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 0593: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Substitutions: By specific designation and description, standards are established for specialties and equipment. Other makes of specialties and equipment of equal quality will be considered provided such proposed substitutions are submitted to the Architect for his approval, complete with specification data showing how it meets the specifications, at least 5 working days prior to bid opening. A list of approved substitutions will be published as an addendum. 1. Submit a single copy of Manufacturer's catalog data including Manufacturer's complete specification for each proposed substitution. 2. The Architect or Engineer is to be the sole judge as to the quality of any material offered as an equal. Product Data, Shop Drawings: Within 30 days after award of contract, submit 10 sets of Manufacturer's catalog data for each manufactured item. 1. Literature shall include enough information to show complete compliance with Contract Document requirements. 2. Mark literature to indicate specific item with applicable data underlined. 3. Information shall include but not be limited to capacities, ratings, type of material used, guarantee, and such dimensions as are necessary to check space requirements. 4. When accepted, submittal shall be an addition to Contract Documents and shall be in equal force. No variation shall be permitted. 5. Even though the submittals have been accepted by the Engineer, it does not relieve the contractor from meeting all of the requirements of the plans and specifications and providing a complete and operational system. Common HVAC Requirements - 1 - 230501 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design C. Drawings of Record: One complete sets of blue line mechanical drawings shall be provided for the purpose of showing a complete picture of the work as actually installed. - I. These drawings shall serve as work progress report sheets. Contractor shall make notations neat and legible therein daily as the work proceeds. 2. The drawings shall be kept at the job at a location designated by the Mechanical Engineer. 3. At completion of the project these "as -built" drawings shall be signed by the Contractor, dated, and returned to the Architect. D. Operating Instructions and Service Manual: The Mechanical Contractor shall prepare 2 copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual for all mechanical systems and equipment used in this project. Manuals shall be bound in hard -backed binders and the front cover and spine of each binder shall indicate the name and location of the project. Use plastic tab indexes for all sections. Provide a section for each different type of equipment item. The following items shall be included in the manual, together with any other pertinent data. This list is not complete and is to be used as a guide. 1. Provide a master index at the beginning of the manual showing all items included. 2. The first section of the manual shall contain: a. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Mechanical Engineer, Electrical Engineer, General Contractor, Plumbing Contractor, Sheet Metal Contractor, and Temperature Control Contractor. b. List of Suppliers which shall include a complete list of each piece of equipment used with the name, address, and telephone number of vendor. C. General Description of Systems including - 1) Location of all major equipment 2) Description of the various mechanical systems 3) Description of operation and control of the mechanical systems 4) Suggested maintenance schedule d. Copy of contractor's written warranty 3. Provide a copy of approved submittal literature for each piece of equipment. 4. Provide maintenance and operation literature published by the manufacturer for each piece of equipment which includes: oiling, lubrication and greasing data; belt sizes, types and lengths; wiring diagrams; step-by-step procedure to follow in putting each piece of mechanical equipment in operation. 5. Include parts numbers of all replaceable items. 6. Provide control diagram and operation sequence, along with labeling of control piping and instruments to match diagram. 7. Include a valve chart indicating valve locations. E. Include air balance and/or water balance reports. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS A. Samples: Sealer and gauze proposed for sealing ductwork. B. Quality Assurance / Control: 1. Manufacturer's installation manuals providing detailed instructions on assembly, joint sealing, and system pressure testing for leaks. 2. Specification data on sealer and gauze proposed for sealing ductwork. C. Quality Assurance 1. Requirements: Construction details not specifically called out in Contract Documents shall conform to applicable requirements of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 2. Pre -Installation Conference: Schedule conference immediately before installation of ductwork. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: L Perform work in accordance with applicable provisions of local and state Plumbing Code, Gas Ordinances, and adoptions thereof. Provide materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations, and ordinances. Common HVAC Requirements - 2 - 230501 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 2. In case of differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, utility company regulations, and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Promptly notify Architect in writing of such differences. B. Applicable Specifications: Referenced specifications, standards, and publications shall be of the issues in effect on date of Advertisement for Bid. I. "Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Guide" published by the American Society of Heating and Air Conditioning Engineers. 2. "Engineering Standards" published by the Heating, Piping, and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. 3. "2006 International Building Code", "2003 Uniform Mechanical Code", and "2003 International Fire Code" as published by the International Conference of Building Officials. 4. 2003 Uniform Plumbing Code as published by the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials. 5. "National Electrical Code" as published by the National Fire Protection Association. 6. "2003 International Energy Conservation Code ". C. Identification: Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall be in place when Project is turned over to Owner. 1.6 INSPECTIONS AND PERMITS A. Pay for permits, fees, or charges for inspection or other services. Local and state codes and ordinances must be properly executed without expense to Owner and are considered as minimum requirements. Local and state codes and ordinances do not relieve the Contractor from work shown that exceeds minimum requirements. 1.7 ADDITIONAL WORK: A. Design is based on equipment as described in the drawing equipment schedule. Any change in foundation bases, electrical wiring, conduit connections, piping, controls and openings required by alternate equipment submitted and approved shall be paid for by this division. All work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the applicable sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS FOR COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS A. Finishes, Where Applicable: Colors as selected by Architect. B. Duct Hangers: 1. One inch 25 mm by 18 ga 1.27 nun galvanized steel straps or steel rods as shown on Drawings, and spaced not more than 96 incites 2 400 mm apart. Do not use wire hangers. 2. Attaching screws at trusses shall be 2 inch 50 mm No. 10 round head wood screws. Nails not allowed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Site Inspection: 1. Examine premises and understand the conditions which may affect performance of work of this Division before submitting proposals for this work. 2. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to failure to examine site conditions. B. Drawings: 1. Mechanical drawings show general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc, and do not attempt to show complete details of building construction which affect installation. This Contractor shall refer to architectural, structural, and electrical drawings for additional building detail which affect installation of his work. Common HVAC Requirements - 3 - 230501 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 2. 3. a. Follow mechanical drawings as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit. b. No extra payments will be allowed where piping and/or ductwork must be offset to avoid other work or where minor changes are necessary to facilitate installation. C. Everything shown on the mechanical drawings shall be the responsibility of Mechanical Contractor unless specifically noted otherwise. Consider architectural and structural drawings part of this work insofar as these drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. These drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings. Because of small scale of mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required to meet conditions. Do not scale drawings for locations of equipment or piping. Refer to large scale dimensioned drawings for exact locations. C. Insure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment of size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. 1. If approval is received to use other than specified items, responsibility for specified capacities and insuring that items to be furnished will fit space available lies with this Division. 2. If non-specified equipment is used and it will not fitjob site conditions, this Contractor assumes responsibility for replacement with items named in Contract Documents. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or trusses. 1. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials. 2. Each Section of this Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing of work of other Sections required because of its fault, error, tardiness, or because of damage done by it. 3. Cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavements, sidewalks, roads, and curbs to permit installation of work of this Division is responsibility of Section installing work. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, unions, traps, starters, motors, control components, and to clear openings of doors and access panels. 3.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS: A. Provide storage space for storage of materials and assume complete responsibility for losses due to any cause whatsoever. Storage shall not interfere with traffic conditions in any public thoroughfare. B. Protect completed work, work underway, and materials against loss or damage. C. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover fixtures and equipment and protect against dirt, or injury caused by water, chemical, or mechanical accident. 3.5 COOPERATION A. Cooperate with other crafts in coordination of work. Promptly respond when notified that construction is ready for installation of work under Division 23000. Contractor will be held responsible for any delays which might be caused by his negligence or failure to cooperate with the other Contractors or crafts. Common HVAC Requirements - 4 - 230501 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 3.6 SUPERVISION A. Provide a competent superintendent in charge of the work at all times. Anyone found incompetent shall be removed at once and replaced by someone satisfactory, when requested by the Architect. 3.7 INSTALLATION CHECK: A. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer or supplier of each item of equipment indicated in the equipment schedule shall visit the project to inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. In each case, the equipment supplier's representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation. The equipment supplier's representative shall revisit the project as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation is satisfactory to the Engineer. B. Each equipment supplier's representative shall furnish to the Owner, through the Engineer, a written report certifying the following: 1. Equipment has been properly installed and lubricated. 2. Equipment is in accurate alignment. 3. Equipment is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts. 4. Equipment has been operated under full load conditions. 5. Equipment operated satisfactorily. C. All costs for this installation check shall be included in the prices quoted by equipment suppliers. 3.8 CLEANING EQUIPMENT AND PREMISES A. Properly lubricate equipment before Owner's acceptance. B. Clean exposed piping, ductwork, equipment, and fixtures. Repair damaged finishes and leave everything in working order. C. Remove stickers from fixtures and adjust flush valves. D. At date of Substantial Completion, air filters shall be new, clean, and approved by Owner's representative. E. Trap elements shall be removed during cleaning and flushing period. Replace trap elements and adjust after cleaning and flushing period. 3.9 TESTS A. No piping work, fixtures, or equipment shall be concealed or covered until they have been inspected and approved by the inspector. Notify inspector when the work is ready for inspection. B. All work shall be completely installed, tested as required by Contract Documents and the city and county ordinances and shall be leak -tight before the inspection is requested. C. Tests shall be repeated to the satisfaction of those making the inspections. D. Water piping shall be flushed out, tested at 100 psi and left under pressure of supply main or a minimum of 40 psi for the balance of the construction period. 3.10 WARRANTEE A. Contractor shall guarantee work under Division 23 to be free from inherent defects for a period of one year from acceptance. 1. Contractor shall repair, revise or replace any and all such leaks, failure or inoperativeness due to defective work, materials, or parts free of charge for a period of one year from final acceptance, provided such defect is not due to carelessness in operation or maintenance. Common HVAC Requirements - 5 - 230501 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 2. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish all refrigeration emergency repairs, emergency service and all refrigerant required due to defective workmanship, materials, or parts for a period of one year from final acceptance at no cost to the Owner, provided such repairs, service and refrigerant are not caused by lack of proper operation and maintenance. B. In addition to warrantee specified in General Conditions, heating, cooling, and plumbing systems are to be free from noise in operation that may develop from failure to construct system in accordance with Contract Documents. 3.11 SYSTEM START-UP, OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Off -Season Start-up 1. If Substantial Completion inspection occurs during heating season, schedule spring start-up of cooling systems. If inspection occurs during cooling season, schedule autumn start-up for heating systems. 2. Notify Owner 7 days minimum before scheduled start-up. 3. Time will be allowed to completely service, test, check, and off-season start systems. During allowed time, train Owner's representatives in operation and maintenance of system. 4. At end of off-season start-up, furnish Owner with letter confirming that above work has been satisfactorily completed. B. Owner's Instructions 1. Instruct building maintenance personnel and Owner Representative in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing Operation & Maintenance Manual when so doing. 2. Minimum instruction periods shall be as follows — a. Mechanical - Four hours. b. Temperature Control - Four hours. C. Refrigeration - Two hours. 3. Instruction periods shall occur after Substantial Completion inspection when systems are properly working and before final payment is made. 4. None of these instructional periods shall overlap another. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Do not run heat pump, air handling units, fan coil units, or other pieces of equipment used for moving supply air without proper air filters installed properly in system. B. The mechanical systems are not designed to be used for temporary construction heat. If any equipment is to be started prior to testing and substantial completion, such equipment will be returned to new condition with full one year warranties, from date of substantial completion after any construction use. This includes, but is not necessarily limited to: Equipment, filters, ductwork, fixtures, etc. 3.13 COMMON HVAC REQUIREMENTS: A. INSTALLATION 1. During installation, protect open ends of ducts by covering with plastic sheet tied in place to prevent entrance of debris and dirt. 2. Make necessary allowances and provisions in installation of sheet metal ducts for structural conditions of building. Revisions in layout and configuration may be allowed, with prior written approval of Architect. Maintain required airflows in suggesting revisions. 3. Hangers And Supports: a. Install pair of hangers close to each transverse joint and elsewhere as required by spacing indicated in table on Drawings. b. Install upper ends of hanger securely to floor or roof construction above by method shown on Drawings. C. Attach strap hangers to ducts with cadmium -plated screws. Use of pop rivets or other means will not be accepted. d. Where hangers are secured to forms before concrete slabs are poured, cut off flush all nails, strap ends, and other projections after forms are removed. Common HVAC Requirements - 6 - 230501 Project # 3885 0 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design C. Secure vertical ducts passing through floors by extending bracing angles to rest firmly on floors without loose blocking or shimming. Support vertical ducts, which do not pass through floors, by using bands bolted to walls, columns, etc. Size, spacing, and method of attachment to vertical ducts shall be same as specified for hanger bands on horizontal ducts. CLEANING 1. Clean interior of duct systems before final completion. END OF SECTION 23 0501 Common HVAC Requirements - 7 - 230501 Project # 3885 PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 6-25-2010 SECTION 23 0502 DEMOLITION AND REPAIR Austin Welding Lab Design A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 0501 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Under this section remove obsolete piping and mechanical equipment and relocate, reconnect or replace existing piping affected by demolition or new construction. Remove concealed piping abandoned due to demolition or new construction, or cap piping flush with existing surfaces. 1.3 DRAWINGS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS A. All relocations, reconnections and removals are not necessarily indicated on the drawings. As such, the Contractor shall make adequate allowance in his proposal for this work as no extra charges will be allowed for these items. PART 2 - NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS A. Where existing piping must remain in service to supply occupied areas during construction, provide temporary piping, connections, and equipment to maintain service to such areas. All shall be performed in a neat and safe manner to prevent injury to the building or its occupants. 3.2 EXISTING TO BE ABANDONED A. All Required drilling, cutting, block-outs and demolition work required for the removal and/or installation of the mechanical system is the responsibility of this Contractor. B. No joists, beams, girders, trusses or columns shall be cut by any Contractor without written permission from the Architect. C. The patching, repair, and finishing to existing or new surfaces is the responsibility of this Contractor, unless specifically called for under sections of specifications covering these materials. D. Disconnect all equipment that is to be removed or relocated. Relocate any existing equipment that obstructs new construction. 3.3 EXISTING TO REMAIN IN USE A. Where affected by demolition or new construction, relocate, replace, extend, or repair piping and equipment to allow continued use of same. Use methods and materials as specified for new construction. 3.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT REMOVED A. All obsolete materials, piping, and equipment shall become the property of the Contractor and be removed from the site promptly. END OF SECTION 23 0502 Demolition And Repair - 1 - 230502 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 23 0514 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEM PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install variable frequency drive system (VFD) as described in Contract Documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The complete VFD package being supplied shall be listed and carry the label of at least one of the following: UL - Underwriters Laboratory; ETL - ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc.; CSA - Canadian Standards Association. 1.4 SUPPLIER & VENDOR REQUIREMENTS A. Suppliers of VFD systems must be in the primary business of supplying variable frequency drives and have a minimum of five (5) years of service in that business. 1.5 w B. Vendor must have local service center with factory spare parts inventory and factory authorized service technician on call 24 hr/day. The vendor must be able to show that the recommended spare parts are available locally and any repair could take place within 24 hours for equipment supplied on this project. TESTING A. Prior to shipping, each unit shall be tested and a certified test report shall be supplied with each unit. Standard tests to include: 1. Visual inspection - consisting of checking unit enclosure, wiring, connections, fasteners, covers and locking mechanism. 2. High pot test: Two (2) X rated voltage plus 1000 volts AC for 60 seconds shall be applied per UL 508 on all peripheral drive system power components (circuit breakers, contactors, motor overloads, line reactors, disconnect switches, etc.) as a complete package. A copy of test results shall be included in operation manuals. 3. Motor run test. 4. Control panel devices; test all devices and lights. 5. Optional equipment; test optional equipment specified with VFD system. 6. Special tests; as required and specified. DRAWINGS/MANUALS A. Vendor shall supply approval drawings of system being supplied, in strict compliance with the specifications, within two (2) weeks ARO. Drawings shall include, as a minimum: 1. General arrangement of each unit showing size and incoming and outgoing conduit locations. 2. Schematic. 3. Connection diagram, sufficient to install drive system. B. Each unit shall be supplied with two owner/maintenance manuals which shall include: I. Vendor information of equipment being supplied. 2. Connection Information. 3. Startup Procedure. 4. Fault Reset Instruction. Variable Frequency Drive System - 1 - 230514 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 5. Wiring Diagrams (power and control). 6. Parts List. 7. Test Results: Harmonic voltage distortion on line with unit off Harmonic voltage distortion with unit on line Telephone Influence Factor (TIF) Report Transformer Derate Report Displacement Power Factor Report 1.7 WARRANTY Austin Welding Lab Design A. The vendor shall supply a warranty consisting of the following: 1. Unit shall carry a warranty of parts and labor for I year after start-up. 2. The unit is to be stored in a vendor approved area, said area to be free of dirt, vibration and moisture. Unit shall not be exposed to excessive heat or cold. 3. The unit is not to be started by owner or his contractor, but by a vendor -furnished field start-up service technician. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. The vendor shall verify compatibility of the VFD System being supplied with the specified motor. The motor shall be high efficiency with a 1.15 service factor, and shall be subject to VFD vendor approval. B. Each system shall be supplied in a NEMA 12 force ventilated filtered enclosure, either wall mounted or free standing. C. Each system shall have screened or engraved labels on all door operator and pilot devices. D. Each system shall bear an electrical shock warning label to warn personnel that a potential of electric shock exists. E. Each system shall be supplied complete, wired with all components assembled in a single enclosure including, but not limited to the VFD units, contactors, door interlocked circuit breaker, differential pressure controller, and/or other items listed in this specification or shown on the plans. Units requiring mounting and interwiring of separate bypass enclosure shall not be acceptable under this specification. F. The vendor shall supply a complete set of engineering drawings consisting of, as a minimum, general arrangements, power wiring diagram, control wiring diagram and schematic of VFD System components and options. G. The vendor shall supply an owner's manual consisting of catalog sheets listing actual component and part numbers. Manual shall also show test certificates, warranty and service personnel responsible for warranty. H. Vendor shall supply VFD System and start-up service. Mounting unit and connecting to power supply and mounting and wiring of remote devices shall be by mechanical contractor. I. The VFD inverter shall be altitude compensated and sized for the elevation at which the unit will be installed. The inverter shall operate in an ambient temperature of -10 degrees C to 50 degrees C and humidity of 0% to 90% noncondensing. J. The VFD inverter unit shall be mounted on a removable panel along with all other components such that, if required, panel could be removed from enclosure for maintenance or part replacement. K. The door shall be mounted with a minimum of two hinges with removable pins. Door shall be rigid and large doors shall have additional hinges and stiffening steel. Variable Frequency Drive System - 2 - 230514 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design L. Enclosure shall be painted with high grade enamel, with a minimum of 50-70 microns thick. M. The enclosure shall be force ventilated and the exhaust ports covered with louvers. All components of the system shall be contained in this single enclosure as an integrated package. N. Door mounted operator devices shall be industrial oil tight similar to those found on motor control centers. I O. All control power for operator devices and customer connections shall be 120 volts. The control power transformer shall be a "Machine Tool" type and have both primary and secondary fusing. 2.2 STANDARD FEATURES A. The VFD unit shall be a solid state AC to DC converter sinusoidal pulse -width modulation (PWM) type. i I B. The unit shall operate on: I Input Voltage 208 VAC +/- 10% i Input Frequency 60 Hz +/- 5% C. Motor braking torque shall be available by means of regenerative braking. D. The drive shall contain an output frequency clamp such that minimum of maximum output frequency can be set at desired limits. E. The VFD shall be rated for 115% continuous current equal to the motor service factor. j F. Rated overload current shall be 150% for 1 minute. !� G. The VFD unit shall have an adjustable acceleration/deceleration time setting from 1 second to 120 seconds. H. The VFD unit shall maintain a 95% or better displacement power factor over the entire speed range. I. The inverter shall be supplied with a door interlocked input disconnect motor circuit protector. The MCP i shall allow trip adjustment sufficient to start the motor across the line in the bypass mode and normally be set at a minimum setting for maximum protection in the VFD mode. The door mounted handle shall be able to lock in the Off position. J. The following door mounted operator controls shall be provided as a minimum: Hand/Off/Auto Switch Local/Remote Selector Frequency Setting Speed Selector Frequency Indication Meter Calibrated in % Speed I Power on Light — VFD/Bypass Switch VFD Enable Light Bypass on Light VFD Fault Light External Fault Light (safeties interlock) K. The inverter shall have a minimum of the following protective features with an alarm display indication: Overcurrent shut-off Regenerative Overvoltage Electronic Thermal Protector Heatsink Overheat Instantaneous Power Failure Ground Fault Variable Frequency Drive System - 3 - 230514 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design L. The following termination points shall be provided on a terminal strip for field connections: Safeties Interlock (N.C. Contacts by owner) Remote Start/Stop Contact (N.O. Contacts by owner) Remote VFD Fault Contact (N.C.) Remote VFD/Bypass Enable Contact (N.O.) Remote Electronic Signal Input (4-20Ma) M. Auto restart shall be initiated by means of an automatic time delayed restart after recovering from undervoltage or loss of power. The inverter shall not automatically restart after overcurrent, overvoltage, overtemperature, or any other damaging conditions, but shall require a manual restart. N. Bypass: The inverter shall be supplied with a bypass contactor arrangement for transfer to the feeder line to operate at constant speed. The Contactors shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked and supplied with an adjustable motor overload relay. O. A VFD isolation switch shall be provided to allow maintenance on the VFD while operating in the bypass mode. It will be prewired in the same enclosure, including contactors, input disconnect MCP, motor overload, VFD/Bypass selector switch and Bypass ON light. Digital or Analog Ammeter. Q. Elapsed Time meter. R. NEMA 12 Enclosure with filters on forced -ventilation system. S. Frequency Jump: The drive shall be supplied with the capability of being field retrofitted with a frequency jump control to avoid operating at a point of resonance with the natural frequency of the machine. T. VFD unit shall have computer signal control option through the addition of a RS 232 data card which can be added at any time by plugging said card in existing unit. U. Fault Diagnostics: The drive system shall have non-volatile fault retention so that the VFDs fault history is available from memory even after power loss. 2.3 HARMONIC TESTING AND CORRECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Vendor of VFD system shall supply a harmonic voltage distortion report once unit is installed. Said report shall show harmonic voltage distortion on line with VFD unit Off and with VFD unit running (at highest operating speed). B. Vendor shall guarantee the following 1. Harmonic voltage distortion, on line does not increase by more than 3% once VFD unit is operating on line. 2. The vendor shall provide complete field testing to measure harmonic, power factor, and voltage rise parameters, and provide a certified report. 3. The owner and/or engineer may (at their option) witness any of the tests required in this section. C. Vendor shall correct harmonic voltage distortion by supplying reactors and/or filters, at his cost, to stay within the above limits. The contractor shall install these devices if supplied. D. After VFD unit is installed, vendor shall take harmonic voltage and current distortion readings as described above and supply actual strip chart recordings of same with owner's manual with copy to Architect. 2.4 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Energy Management Corporation EMC M Series Variable Frequency Drive System - 4 - 23 0514 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 B. Mitsubishi VTP Series C. Toshiba G2 Series 2.5 APPROVED SUPPLIERS Austin Welding Lab Design A. The following suppliers have been approved for assembling and local support of the VFDS: 1. Energy Management Corporation 2. Toshiba 3. Other manufacturers and suppliers may submit for prior approval by submitting a point -by -point compliance to these specifications to the engineer at least 10 days before the published bid date. Sample test reports shall be included. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Painting: Manufacturer's standard paint shall be supplied. Touch-up paint shall be supplied if required. B. Mounting and power connection shall be provided by mechanical contractor. C. Vendor to supply field start-up service by an authorized factory service representative consisting of system check-out, start-up and system run. The vendor shall provide warranty and authorized factory service including operator training (if required). A written certificate of same shall be provided at start- up. VFD service technicians shall be full time employees of the vendor or manufacturer, primarily engaged in VFD service work during normal business hours and also on call 24 hours a day. Start-up by sales representative is not acceptable. END OF SECTION 23 0514 Variable Frequency Drive System - 5 - 230514 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Division 23 - Basic Mechanical Requirements and Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY SCOPE A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following: I. Air Systems. a. VAV Boxes. b. Exhaust fan. 2. Hydronic Piping Systems. a. VAV Box Coils b. Pumps 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Agency Data: I. Submit proof that the proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meets the qualifications specified below. The firm or individuals performing the work herein specified may not be the installing firm. B. Engineer and Technicians Data: 1. Submit proof that the Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise the procedures, and the technicians proposed to perform the procedures meet the qualifications specified below. C. Procedures and Agenda: Submit a synopsis of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures and agenda proposed to be used for this project. D. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms, if other than those standard forms prepared by the AABC or NEBB are proposed. E. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature of the Test and Balance Engineer. The reports shall be certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the referenced standards; are an accurate representation of how the systems have been installed; are a true representation of how the systems are operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures; and are an accurate record of all final quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the systems. Follow the procedures and format specified below. 1. Draft Reports: Upon completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures, prepare draft reports on the approved forms. Draft reports may be hand written, but must be complete, factual, accurate, and legible. Organize and format draft reports in the same manner specified for the final reports. Submit 2 complete sets of draft reports. Only I complete set of draft reports will be returned. 2. Final Report: Upon verification and approval of draft reports, prepare final reports, type written, and organized and formatted as specified below. Submit 4 complete sets of final reports. 3. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by the referenced standard for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. Bind report fors complete with schematic systems diagrams and other data. Divide the contents of the binder into the below listed divisions, separated by divider tabs: a. General Information and Summary b. Air Systems Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing - 1 - 230593 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design C. Temperature Control System Verification. Report Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms, and data: I. General information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing, adjusting, balancing agency, Contractor, Owner, Engineer, and Project. Include addresses and contact names and telephone numbers. Also include a certification sheet containing the seal and name, address, telephone number, and signature of the Certified Test and Balance Engineer. Include in this division a listing of the instrumentation used for the procedures along with the instrument calibration sheet. 2. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms containing as a minimum, the information indicated on the standard report forms prepared by the AABC or NEBB, for each respective item and system. Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany each respective report form. The report shall contain the following information, and all other data resulting from the testing, adjusting, and balancing work: a. All nameplate and specification data for all air handling equipment and motors. b. Actual metered running amperage for each phase of each motor on all pumps and air handling equipment. C. Actual metered voltage at air handling equipment (phase -to -phase for all phases). d. Fan RPM for each piece of air handling equipment. C. Total actual CFM being handled by each piece of air handling equipment. f. Actual CFM of systems by rooms. 3. Certify that all smoke and fire dampers operate properly and can be reset under actual system operating conditions. G. Calibration Reports: 1. Submit proof that all required instrumentation has been calibrated to tolerances specified in the referenced standards, within a period of six months prior to starting the project. 1.4 CERTIFICATION A. Agency Qualifications 1. Employ the services of a certified testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meeting the qualifications specified below, to be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building mechanical systems identified above, to produce the design objectives. Services shall include checking installations for conformity to design, measurement, and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, recording and reporting the results, and operation of all systems to demonstrate satisfactory performance to the owner. 2. The testing, adjusting, and balancing agency certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) in those testing and balancing disciplines required for this project, and having at least one person certified by NEBB or AABC as a Test and Balance supervisor, and a registered professional mechanical engineer, licensed in the state where the work will be performed. B. Codes and Standard 1. NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." - 2. AABC: "National Standards for Total System Balance." 3. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 1984 Systems Volume, Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Systems Operation: Systems shall be fully operation and clean prior to beginning procedures. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Test, adjust, and balance the air systems before hydronic, steam, and refrigerant systems within +10% to - 5% of contract requirements. Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing - 2 - 230593 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design B. The report shall be approved by the Engineer. Test and balance shall be performed prior to substantial completion. PART 2 - NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEM BALANCING A. Before operating the system, perform these steps. 1. Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with the design intent. 2. Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of all air handling equipment, outlets (supply, return, and exhaust) and temperature control diagrams. 3. Compare design to installed equipment and field installations. 4. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to determine variations of installation from design. 5. Check filters for cleanliness and to determine if they are the type specified. 6. Check dampers (both volume and fire) for correct and locked position. Check automatic operating and safety controls and devices to determine that they are properly connected, functioning, and at proper operating setpoint. 7. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended procedures for testing. Prepare a summation of required outlet volumes to permit a cross-check with required fan volumes. 8. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct traverses. 9. Place outlet dampers in the full open position. 10. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "As -Built" ductwork and piping layouts to facilitate reporting. 11. Lubricate all motors and bearings. 12. Check fan belt tension. 13. Check fan rotation. 3.2 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive -displacement pumps: 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. 2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head -capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved. 3. Verify pump -motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. 1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow -pressure -drop relationship may be used as a flow -indicating device. D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: 1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing - 3 - 230593 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 2. 3. Adjust each station in tum, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. Record settings and mark balancing devices. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor -air temperature. G. Measure the differential -pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing. 3.3 MEASUREMENTS A. Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to the tolerances specified in the referenced standards. Instruments shall be properly maintained and protected against damage. B. Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced standards. C. Use only those instruments which have the maximum field measuring accuracy and are best suited to the function being measured. D. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Use instruments with minimum scale and maximum subdivisions and with scale ranges proper for the value being measured. When averaging values, take a sufficient quantity of readings which will result in a repeatability error of less than 5%. When measuring a single point, repeat readings until 2 consecutive identical values are obtained. G. Take all readings with the eye at the level of the indicated value to prevent parallax. Use pulsation dampeners where necessary to eliminate error involved in estimating average of rapidly fluctuation readings. I. Take measurements in the system where best suited to the task. 3.4 PERFORMING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordance with the detailed procedures outlined in the referenced standards. Balancing of the air systems and hydronic systems shall be achieved by adjusting the automatic controls, balancing valves, dampers, air terminal devices, and the fan/motor drives within each system. Cut insulation, ductwork, and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. C. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed. D. Seal ducts and piping, and test for and repair leaks. E. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier. F. Adjust timing relays of environmental equipment motor reduced voltage starters to the optimum time period for the motor to come up to the maximum reduced voltage speed and then transition to the full voltage speed to prevent damage to motor, and to limit starting current spike to the lowest possible and practical. G. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. Mark with paint or other suitable, permanent Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing - 4 - 230593 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding lab Design identification materials. H. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit test results. 3.5 RECORD AND REPORT DATA A. Record all data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing in accordance with, and on the forms recommended by the referenced standards, and as approved on the sample report forms. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when system cannot be successfully balanced. C. Report shall be certified and stamped by a registered professional mechanical engineer employed by the agency and licensed in the state where the work will be performed. D. Engineer is to provide a floor plan and test and balance contractor to include the plan in test and balance report and identify actual cfm on drawing or number the diffusers to match report. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. If requested, testing, adjusting, and balancing agency shall conduct any or all of the field tests in the presence of the engineer. B. Agency shall include a maximum of one (1) call back to the project within the one year warranty period to make additional adjustments if requested by the engineer. END OF SECTION 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing - 5 - 230593 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 23 0715 — HOT WATER HEATING & RETURN PIPING INSULATION PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install insulation on piping mains, branches, risers, fittings, and valves, pump bodies and flanges as described in Contract Documents. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL A. 6 1b./cu.ft. heavy density fiberglass with fire retardant vapor barrier jacket with self sealing laps. Thickness shall be 1-1/2 inches on heating supply and return lines. Approved Manufacturers: I. Owens -Coming Fiberglass heavy density with ASJ-SSL jacket 2. Equals by Johns -Manville or CTM. 3. Zeston covers for valves and fittings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Pipes 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's directions on clean dry pipes. 2. Buttjoints firmly together. 3. Seal vapor barrier longitudinal seam overlap with vapor barrier adhesive. 4. Wrap buttjoints with four inch strip of vapor barrierjacket material cemented with vapor barrier adhesive. 5. Finish with bands applied at mid-section and at each end of insulation. B. Valves & Fittings 1. Insulate and finish by one of following methods: a. With hydraulic setting insulating cement, or equal, to thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. b. With segments of molded insulation securely wired in place. c. With prefabricated covers made from molded pipe insulation finished with vapor barrier adhesive. d. Zeston covers and factory applied insulation diapers. 2. Finish fittings and valves with four ounce canvas and coat with vapor barrier adhesive or Zeston covers. END OF SECTION 23 0715 Hot Water Heating & Return Piping Insulation - 1 - 230715 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 23 0800 FIRE STOPPING 17.1IgaQrl aa1tZ\9 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install fire stopping as described in Contract Documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire stopping material shall meet ASTM E814, E84 and be UL listed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Material shall be flexible, long lasting, intumescent acrylic seal to accommodate vibration and building movement. B. Caulk simple penetrations with gaps of 1/4" or less with: 1. Dow Corning Fire Stop Sealant 2. Pensil300 C. Caulk multiple penetrations and/or penetrations with gaps in excess of 1/4" with: 1. Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam 2. Pensil200 3. IPC flame safe FS -1900 4. Tremco "Tremstop IA" PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions explicitly. B. Seal penetrations of ductwork, piping, and other mechanical equipment through one-hour and two-hour rated partitions as shown on Architectural and Mechanical Drawings. C. Install fire stopping material on clean surfaces to assure adherence. END OF SECTION 23 0800 Fire Stopping - 1 - 230800 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 23 2113 - HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping, special -duty valves, and condensate drain piping. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of special -duty valve indicated. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings, calibrated balancing valves, and automatic flow - control valves. B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. D. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements. E. Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special -duty valves to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 23. F. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project site. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression -system components, and partition assemblies. B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations. C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections. Hydronic Piping - 1 - 232113 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections. F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for ftrestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies. 7 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS I A. Water Treatment Chemicals: Furnish sufficient chemicals for initial system startup and for preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS i A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: j B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Grooved Mechanical -Joint Fittings and Couplings: a. Central Sprinkler Company; Central Grooved Piping Products. b. Grinnell Mechanical Products. C. V ictaulic Company of America. 2. Calibrated Balancing Valves: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Flow Design, Inc. C. Gerand Engineering Company. d. Griswold Controls. e. ITT Bell & Gossett; ITT Fluid Technology Corp. f. Taco, Inc. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials. 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Drawn -Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L. B. Annealed -Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K. C. Wrought -Copper Fittings: ASME 816.22. D. Wrought -Copper Unions: ASME B 16.22. E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony. F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-I (silver). 2.4 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless) or Type F (fumace-butt welded), Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends. B. Steel Pipe, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric -resistance welded), Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends. Hydronic Piping - 2 - 232113 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design C. Steel Pipe, NPS 14 through NPS 18: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric -resistance welded) or Type S (seamless), Grade B, Schedule 30, black steel, plain ends. D. Steel Pipe, NPS 20: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric -resistance welded) or Type S (seamless), Grade B, Schedule 20, black steel, plain ends. 1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black steel; seamless for NPS 2 and smaller and electric -resistance welded for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. E. Wrought -Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe. F. Wrought Cast- and Forged -Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B 16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 1. Material Group: I.I. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face. G. Grooved Mechanical -Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings. H. Grooved Mechanical -Joint Couplings: Ductile- or malleable -iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure -responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. I. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire -reinforcing protective jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded -end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4 -inch misalignment. J. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber -reinforced rubber body with steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating temperatures up to 250 deg F and pressures up to 150 psig. K. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 150-psig minimum working pressure, steel pipe fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip -pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit rods, flanged ends, and chrome - plated finish on slip -pipe telescoping section. L. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being welded. M. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design temperatures and pressures. 2.5 VALVES A. Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves." B. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve. C. Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, ball type, 125-psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, and having threaded ends. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seats, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position. 2.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES A. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 225 deg F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with NPS 1/8 discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection. Hydronic Piping - 3 - 232113 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design - — B. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150 -prig working pressure; 240 degF operating temperature; with NPS 1/4 discharge - - connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection. C. Y -Pattern Strainers: 125 -prig working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Heating Water, NPS 2 and Smaller: Aboveground, use Type L drawn -temper copper tubing with soldered joints or Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints. Belowground or within slabs, use Type K annealed -temper copper tubing with soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints belowground and within floor slabs. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. General -Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types: 1. Shutoff Duty: Gate, ball, and butterfly valves. 2. Throttling Duty: Globe, ball, and butterfly valves. B. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch line. Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Install calibrated balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or cooling element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Refer to Division 15 Section 'Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation requirements. B. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. C. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. D. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. E. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the - takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up -feed risers, install the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe. G. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure -reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction. Hydronic Piping - 4 - 232113 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing of supports. B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. cal runs at roof, at each floor, and at l0 -foot intervals between floors. 3.5 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat -transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. B. Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system piping, at heat - transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. 3.6 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections. B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment, C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansionjoints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid. 3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, 'Building Services Piping." 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6. Prepare written report of testing. Hydronic Piping - 5 - 232113 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position. B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system: 1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves. 2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation. 3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. 4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves. 7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design requirements. 8. Lubricate motors and bearings. 3.9 CLEANING A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable fine -mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers. END OF SECTION 23 2113 Hydronic Piping - 6 - 232113 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 23 3114 LOW-PRESSURE STEEL DUCTWORK PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install above -grade ductwork and related items as described in Contract Documents. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTS A. Fabricate of zinc -coated lockforming quality steel sheets meeting requirements of ASTM 653A/653M, "Specification for Sheet Steel Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality" with G 60 coating. B. Use of aluminum, non-metallic, or round ducts is not permitted. [Specification writer: Use of aluminum ducts in areas with high chlorine content (eg.: ventilation for pools, spas, etc.) should be considered on a perjob basis.] 2.2 DUCT JOINTS A. Ducts with sides up to and including 36 inches shall be as detailed in the SMACNA manual. B. Duct sizes over 36 inches shall be fabricated using SMACNA T-24 flange joints or pre -fabricated systems as follows: 1. Ducts with sides over 36 inches to 48 inches: a. ransverse ductjoint system by Ductmate/25, Nexus, Ward, or WDCI (Lite) (SMACNA "E" or "G" Type connection). 2. Ducts 48 inches & larger: a. Ductmate/35, Nexus, or WDCI (Heavy) (SMACNA "J" Type connection). 3. Approved Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries Inc, 10760 Bay Meadows Drive, Sandy, UT 84092 (801) 571-5308 b. Nexus, Exanno Corp, P O Box 729, Buffalo, NY 14206 (716) 849-0545 C. Ward Industries Inc, 1661 Lebanon Church Road, Pittsburg, PA 15236 (800) 466-9374 d. WDCI, P O Box 10868, Pittsburg, PA 15236 (800) 245-3188 2.3 ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTS A. At each manual outside air damper and at each motorized damper, install factory built insulated access door with hinges and sash locks. Locate doors within 6 inches of installed dampers. Construction shall be galvanized sheet metal, 24 ga minimum. B. Fire and smoke damper access doors shall have a minimum clear opening of 12" x 12" or as specified on Drawings to easily service fire or smoke damper. Doors shall be within 6 inches of fire and smoke dampers and in Mechanical Room if possible. C. Identify each door with 1/2" high letters reading "smoke damper" or "fire damper". D. Approved Manufacturers: 1. AirBalance - Fire/Seal #FSA 100 Low-pressure Steel Ductwork - 1 - 233114 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 2. Air Control Products - HAD -10 3. Cesco-Advanced Air - HAD -10 4. Elgen - Model 85 A 5. Kees Inc - ADH -D. 6. Louvers & Dampers - #SMD -G -F 7. Nailor-Hart Industries Inc - Series 0831 8. National Controlled Air Inc - Model AD -FL -1 2.4 FLEXIBLE EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. 30 oz closely woven UL approved glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. B. Fire retardant, waterproof, air -tight, resistant to acids and grease, and withstand constant temperatures of 250 deg F. C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Cain - N-100 2. Duro Dyne - MEN 3. Elgen - ZLN 4. Ventfabrics - Ventglas 2.5 VOLUME DAMPERS A. In Main Ducts: 1. 16 gauge galvanized steel, opposed blade type with 3/8 inch pins and end bearings. Blades shall have 1/8 inch clearance all around. 2. Damper shall operate within acoustical duct liner. 3. Provide channel spacer equal to thickness of duct liner. 4. Approved Manufacturers: a. Air Balance - Model AC -2 b. Air Control Products - CD -OB C. American Warming - VC -2 -AA d. Greenheck - VCD-1100 e. NCA, Safe Air f Vent Products - 5100 B. In Sheet Metal Branch Ducts 1. Extruded aluminum, opposed blade type. When in open position, shall not extend beyond damper G frame. 2. Maximum blade length 12 inches. 3. Damper Regulator shall be concealed type with operation from bottom or with 90 deg miter gear assembly from side. 4. Approved Manufacturers: a. Air Control Products - TCD -OB b. Air Guide - OB C. Arrow - OBDAF-207 d. CESCO - CDA e. Reliable Metals - OBD-RO f. Tuttle & Bailey - A7RDDM g. Safe Air It. Young - 820 -AC C. Dampers above removable ceiling and in Mechanical Rooms shall have locking quadrant on bottom or side of duct. Otherwise, provide concealed ceiling damper regulator and cover plate. 2.6 DUCT HANGERS A. I" x 18 gauge galvanized steel straps or steel rods as shown on Drawings, and spaced not more than 8 feet apart. Do not use wire hangers. Low-pressure Steel Ductwork - 2 - 233114 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design B. Attaching screws at trusses shall be 1-1/2 inch No. 10 round head wood screws. Nails not allowed. 2.7 DUCT SEALER A. Cain - Duct Butter or Butter Tak B. Design Polymerics - DP 1010 C. DSC - Stretch Coat D. Duro Dyne - S2 E. Hardcast - #601 Iron -Grip or Peel -N -Seal Tape 1. Kingco - 15-325 2. Mon -Eco - 44-41 3. Trans -Continental Equipment Co - Multipurpose Duct Sealant 4. United - Sheet Metal duct -sealer PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Ducts: 1. Straight and smooth on inside with joints neatly finished unless otherwise directed. 2. Duct panels through 48 inch dimension having acoustic duct liner need not be crossbroken or beaded. 3. Crossbreak unlined ducts and duct panels larger than 48 inch or bead 12 inches on center. 4. Securely anchor ducts to building structure with specified duct hangers attached with screws. Do not hang more than one duct from a duct hanger. 5. Brace and install ducts so they shall be free of vibration under all conditions of operation. 6. Ducts shall not bear on top of structural members. 7. Make duct take -offs to branches, registers, grilles, and diffusers as detailed on Drawings. 8. Ducts shall be large enough to accommodate inside acoustic duct liner. Dimensions shown on Drawings are net clear inside dimensions after duct liner has been installed. 9. Properly flash where ducts protrude above roof. 10. Install internal ends of slip joints indirection of flow. Make joints airtight using specified duct sealer. 11. Cover horizontal and longitudinal joints on exterior ducts with two layers of Hardcast tape installed with Hardcast HC -20 adhesive according to Manufacturer's recommendations. 12. Paint ductwork visible through registers, grilles, and diffusers flat black. B. Install flexible inlet and outlet duct connections to each furnace, fan, fan coil unit, and air handling unit. C. Install concealed ceiling damper regulators. 1. Paint cover plates to match ceiling tile. } 2. Damper regulators will not be required for dampers located directly above removable ceilings or in Mechanical Rooms. D. Provide each take -off with an adjustable volume damper to balance that branch. I. Anchor dampers securely to duct. 2. Install dampers in main ducts within insulation. 3. Dampers in branch ducts shall fit against sheet metal walls, bottom and top of duct, and be securely fastened. Cut duct liner to allow damper to fit against sheet metal. 4. Where concealed ceiling damper regulators are installed, provide a cover plate. E. Install grilles, registers, and diffusers. Level floor registers and anchor securely into floor. F. Air Tums: Low-pressure Steel Ductwork - 3 - 233114 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 1. Permanently installed, consisting of single thickness curved metal blades with one inch straight trailing edge to permit air to make abrupt tum without appreciable turbulence, in 90 degree elbows of above ground supply and return ductwork. 2. 4-1/2 inch wide minimum vane rail. Do not use junior vane rails. 3. Double thickness vanes not acceptable. 4. Quiet and free from vibration when system is in operation. See SMACNA Manual END OF SECTION 23 3114 Low-pressure Steel Ductwork - 4 - 233114 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 23 3115 —VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOXES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install variable air volume boxes as described in Contract Documents. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Units shall consist of primary air damper, attenuator section, radiated noise shroud, primary air damper actuator and primary air controller. B. Box Casing 1. Fabricated of heavy gauge (min. 22 ga.f) zinc -coated sheet steel. 2. Lined with V glass fiber which conforms to NFPA-90A. 3. Each box shall be provided with a bottom removal access door of sufficient size to provide access to interior of box. 4. Primary air volume controller and actuator shall be furnished and installed by box manufacturer. C. Controls shall be electronic as specified in control section of this specification and shall be enclosed by a zinc -coated sheet steel cover. 1. Primary air volume controller shall be pressure independent and shall control air volume within plus and minus 5% of design air volume regardless of change in system static pressure. Primary air controller shall reset air volume, as required by thermostat, with the same accuracy. 2. Reset primary air volume shall not be affected by changes in system static pressure. 3. Boxes using cfm limiters are not acceptable. 4. Each box shall be factory set for maximum and minimum cfm. D. Cfm sensing tubes of the automatic averaging type shall be included in each box inlet. The same sensing tube shall also be used as balancing taps for field adjustment of the maximum (and minimum) primary cfm. The balancing taps shall be used in conjunction with a flow chart of each VF box to permit readjustment of maximum (and minimum) primary air volume ifjob conditions so dictate. Field readjustment shall be by means of adjustment screws. A schematic drawing shall be affixed to each VF box indicating proper hookups for controls E. Hot Water Reheat Coils I. Factory famished and installed 2. Two row hot water type 3. Aluminum plate fin and copper tubes and sweat connections. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Enviro-tec 2. Price 3. Or approved equal END OF SECTION 23 3115 Variable Air Volume Boxes - 1 - 233115 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 23 3182 HIGH PRESSURE DUCT PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install high pressure duct systems as described in Contract Documents. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ROUND AND OVAL A. Ducts so designated and supplying air to VAV boxes shall be of spiral lockseam conduit. The conduit shall be fabricated from high quality, bright spangled, open-hearth, galvanized steel and shall be formed with a reinforcing rib on the outside filled with sealant and smooth interior. All duct and fittings shall be for 6 inch WG static pressure. B. Fittings shall be fabricated from galvanized sheets with longitudinal and0 transverse seams welded and coated inside and out with rust inhibiting paint. Branch take -off from tees and laterals shall be welded to the trunk body by means of everdure welding. The fittings shall be formed with a roll shoulder against which the pipe shall be butted in installation. C. Pipe and fittings shall be joined using adhesive recommended by the duct manufacturer painted on the male and female end of the pipe and fittings, pushed into place, fastened with No. 7x3/4 sheet metal screws, wrapped with three layers of fiberglass tape, 2 inches wide. D. Flat -oval ducts shall be installed where shown with fittings of like type and shall be reinforced on the outside with angle iron as detailed and as recommended by the duct manufacturer if the width exceeds twice the height. E. Vertical duct risers shall be supported at each floor by angle iron welded to ducts and connected to building structure at each floor. F. High pressure duct and fittings shall be manufactured by same manufacturer and shall have guaranteed pressure ratings. G. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Team Mechanical 2. United Sheet Metal 3. Lewis Corp. H. Duct Sealant - SMACNA duct sealant class "A". PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING A. High pressure duct system shall be tested in sections after installation. 1. Test shall consist of placing each sealed section under a pressure of 8 inches WG. Air lost by leakage shall not exceed I/2% of the total air quantity. High Pressure Duct - 1 - 233182 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 2. If above test indicates duct leaks beyond conditions specified, joints in ducts shall be treated with soap solution and leaks repaired until above specified conditions are obtained. 3. Tests shall be conducted in presence of Engineer. B. Large vertical risers and ducts in fan room shall be tested with system in operation using soap solution to detect leaks. Leaks indicated by actively blowing bubbles shall be repaired. C. Actual method used shall be as recommended by duct manufacturer. END OF SECTION 23 3182 High Pressure Duct - 2 _ 233182 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 23 3713 AIR OUTLETS & INLETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 23 05 01 apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install wall supply registers, transfer grilles, return air grilles, soffit grilles, ceiling diffusers, louvers connected to ductwork, and registers as described in Contract Documents. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GRILLES & REGISTERS A. Approved Manufacturers: L Price 2. Anemostat 3. Krueger 4. Titus 5. Tuttle & Bailey PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Anchor securely into openings. B. Install with screws to match color and finish of grilles and registers. C. Touch-up any scratched finish surfaces. END OF SECTION 23 3713 END OF DIVISION 23 Air Outlets & Inlets - 1 - 233713 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design DIVISION 26: ELECTRICAL 260000 ELECTRICAL 260501 COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260502 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUMMENTS 260519 LME -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 265000 LIGHTING 265100 LIGHTING END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS INDEX -1- Division 26: Electrical Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 260501 -COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: I. General electrical system requirements and procedures. 2. Make electrical connections to equipment provided under other Sections. 3. Furnish and install Penetration Firestop Systems at electrical system penetrations as described in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data I. Provide following information for each item of equipment: a. Catalog Sheets. b. Assembly details or dimension drawings. C. Installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's name and catalog number. e. Name of local supplier. 2. Furnish such information for following equipment: a. Section 262417: Panelboards. b. Section 26 5100: lighting fixtures. 3. Do not purchase equipment before approval of product data. 4. Submit in three-ring binder with hard cover (six sets) B. Quality Assurance/Control: I. Report of site tests, before Substantial Completion. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. NEC and local ordinances and regulations shall govern unless more stringent requirements are specified. 2. Material and equipment provided shall meet standards of NEMA or UL, or ULC, CSA, or EEMAC and bear their label wherever standards have been established and label service is available. B. Materials and equipment provided under following Sections shall be by same Manufacturer: ]. Sections 26 2416, 26 2816, and 26 2913: Panelboards, Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers, and Enclosed Controllers. C. Contractor shall obtain all permits and arrange all inspections required by local codes and ordinances applicable to this Division. 1.4 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide competent instructor for time required to adequately train maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of electrical equipment and systems. Factory representatives shall assist this instruction as necessary. Schedule instruction period at time of final inspection. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare and submit (4) four complete copies of the O & M Manuals—manuals to contain information listed below. Place each manual in a tabbed three-ring binder upon completion of the project. 1. Operation and Maintenance manual must contain the following items: a. Copies of reviewed shop drawings. b. Letterofl-yearguaranteeofworkmanship. C. Copy of voltage and ammeter readings. COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS -1- 260501 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design d. Copy of letter verifying owner's receipt of spare parts. 1.6 GUARANTEE A. The following guarantee is a part of this specification and shall be binding on the part of the Contractor: "The Contractor guarantees that this installation is free from mechanical defects. He agrees to replace or repair, to the satisfaction ofthe Owner's Representative, any part of this installation which mayfail or be determined unacceptable within a period of one (1) year after final acceptance. " 1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the course of construction, the Electrical Contractor shall maintain a set of drawings upon which all deviations from the original layout are recorded. These marked -up prints shall be turned over to the Architect/Engineer at the con- clusion of the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. All relocations, reconnections, and removals are not necessarily indicated on Drawings. All such work shall be included without additional cost to Owner. B. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of equipment to be installed and coordinate these with site dimensions and with other Sections. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Locations of electrical equipment shown on Drawings are approximate only. Field verify actual locations for proper installation. 2. Coordinate electrical equipment locations and conduit runs with those providing equipment to be served before installation or rough -in. a. Notify Architect of conflicts before beginning work. b. Coordinate locations of power and lighting outlets in mechanical rooms and other areas with mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork, cabinets, etc, so they will be readily accessible and functional. 3. Work related to other trades which is required under this Division, such as cutting and patching, trenching, and backfilling, shall be performed according to standards specified in applicable Sections. B. Install Penetration Firestop System appropriate for penetration at electrical system penetrations through walls, ceilings, and top plates of walls. I. General: All recessed fixtures and devices installed in fire rated walls and ceilings shall be installed to maintain the fire rating of the surface. Coordinate all fire rated surfaces with Architectural Drawings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: Test systems and demonstrate equipment as working and operating properly. Notify Architect before test. Rectify defects at no additional cost to Owner. B. Measure current for each phase of each motor under actual final load operation, i.e. after air balance is completed for fan units, etc. Record this information along with full -load nameplates current rating and size of thermal overload unit installed for each motor. END OF SECTION COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS -2- 260501 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 26 0502 - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To 1. Demolition involving electrical system as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections 1. Section 26 0501 - Common Electrical Requirements 2. New and replacement work specified in appropriate specification Section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. All relocations, reconnections, and removals are not necessarily indicated on Drawings. All such work shall be included without additional cost to Owner. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Disconnect equipment that is to be removed or relocated. Carefully remove, disassemble, or dismantle as required, and store in approved location on site, existing items to be reused in completed work. B. Where affected by demolition or new construction, relocate, extend, or repair raceways, conductors, outlets, and apparatus to allow continued use of electrical system. Use methods and materials as specified for new construction. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. Perform drilling, cutting, block -offs, and demolition work required for removal of necessary portions of electrical system. Do not cutjoists, beams, girders, trusses, or columns without prior written permission from Architect. B. Remove concealed wiring abandoned due to demolition or new construction. Remove circuits, conduits, and conductors that are not to be re -used back to next active fixture, device, orjunction box. C. Patch, repair, and finish surfaces affected by electrical demolition work, unless work is specifically called for under other Sections of the specifications. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove obsolete raceways, conductors, apparatus, and lighting fixtures promptly from site and dispose of legally. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS -1- 260502 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 SECTION 26 0519 - LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of conductors used on Project except as excluded below. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Line Voltage: Over 70 Volts. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Line Voltage Conductors Austin Welding Lab Design 1. Copper with AWG sizes as shown: a. Minimum size shall be No. 12 except where specified otherwise. b. Conductor size No. 8 and larger. 2. Insulation: a. Standard Conductor Size No. 10 And Smaller: 600V type THWN or XHHW (75 deg C). b. Standard Conductor Size No. 8 And Larger: 600V Type TH W, THWN, or XHH W (75 deg C). C. Higher temperature insulation as required by NEC or local codes. 3. Colors: a. 208Y / 120 V System: 1) Black: Phase A. 2) Red: Phase B. 3) Blue: Phase C. 4) Green: Ground. 5) White: Neutral. b. 480Y / 277 Volt System: I) Brown: Phase A. 2) Orange: Phase B. 3) Yellow: Phase C. 4) Gray: Neutral. 5) Green: Ground. C. Conductors size No. 10 and smaller shall be colored full length. Tagging or other methods for coding of conductors size No. 10 and smaller not allowed. d. For feeder conductors larger than No. 10 at pull boxes, gutters, and panels, use painted or taped band or color tag color -coded as specified above. B. Standard Connectors: 1. Conductors No. 8 And Smaller: Steel spring wire connectors. 2. Conductors Larger Than No. 8: Pressure type terminal lugs. 3. Connections Outside Building: Watertight steel spring wire connections with waterproof, non -hardening sealant. C. Terminal blocks for tapping conductors: 1. Terminals shall be suitable for use with 75 deg C copper conductors. 2. Acceptable Products: a. 16323 by Cooper Bussmann, St Louis, MO www.bussmann.com b. LBA363106 by Square D Co, Palatine, IL www.squared.com. C. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 016000. LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE -1- 260519 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Conductors and cables shall be continuous from outlet to outlet. 2. Do not use direct burial cable. B. Line Voltage Conductors (Over 70 Volts): I. Install conductors in raceway except where specifically indicated otherwise. Run conductors of different voltage systems in separate conduits. 2. Route circuits at own discretion, however, circuiting shall be as shown in Panel Schedules. Group circuit homeruns to panels as shown on Drawings. 3. Neutrals: a. On three-phase, 4 -wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than three circuits. b. On single-phase, 3 -wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than two circuits. C. Run separate neutrals for each circuit where specifically noted on Drawings. d. Where common neutral is mn for two or three home run circuits, connect phase conductors to breakers in panel which are attached to separate phase legs so neutral conductors will carry only unbalanced current. Neutral conductors shall be of same size as phase conductors unless specifically noted otherwise. 4. Pulling Conductors: a. Do not pull conductors into conduit until raceway system is complete and cabinets and outlet boxes are free of foreign matter and moisture. b. Do not use heavy mechanical means for pulling conductors. C. Use only listed wire pulling lubricants. END OF SECTION LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE -2- 260519 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 260533 -RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of material and installation procedures for raceway, boxes, and fittings used on Project but furnished under other Divisions. 2. Furnish and install raceway, conduit, and boxes used on Project not specified to be installed under other Divisions. B. Related Sections 1. Section 26 0501: General Electrical Requirements. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Raceway And Conduit: 1. Sizes: a. 3/4 inch min. for exterior underground use. b. 1/2 inch minimum elsewhere, all home runs shall be'/. inch min. unless indicated otherwise. 2. Types: Usage of each type is restricted as specified below by product. a. Galvanized rigid steel or galvanized intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is allowed for use in all areas. Where in contact with earth or concrete, wrap buried galvanized rigid steel and galvanized IMC conduit and fittings completely with vinyl tape. b. Galvanized Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1) Allowed for use only in indoor dry locations where it is: a) Not subject to damage. b) Not in contact with earth. c) Not in concrete. 2) Flexible steel conduit or metal -clad cable required for final connections to indoor mechanical equipment. C. Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit: I ) Allowed for use only underground or below concrete with galvanized rigid steel or IMC elbows and risers. d. Listed, Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: I ) Use in outdoor final connections to mechanical equipment, length not to exceed 36 inches. e. Pre -wired 3/8 Inch Flexible Fixture Whips: Allowed only for connection to recessed lighting fixtures, lengths not to exceed 72 inches. 3. Prohibited Raceway Materials: a. Aluminum conduit. b. Armored cable type AC (BX) cable. B. Raceway And Conduit Fittings: 1. Rigid Steel Conduit And IMC: Threaded and designed for conduit use. 2. EMT: a. Compression type. b. Steel set screw housing type. 3. PVC Conduit: a. PVC type. Use PVC adapters at all boxes. b. PVC components, (conduit, fittings, cement) shall be from same Manufacturer. 4. Flexible Steel Conduit: Screw-in type. 5. Liquid -tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Sealtite type. 6. Expansion fittings shall be equal to OZ Type AX sized to raceway and including bondingjumper. 7. Prohibited Fitting Materials: a. Crimp -on, tap -on, indenter type fittings. b. Cast set -screw fittings for EMT. C. Spray (aerosol) PVC cement. RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -1- 260533 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design C. Outlet Boxes 1. Galvanized steel of proper size and shape are acceptable for all systems. Where metal boxes are used, provide following: a. Provide metal supports and other accessories for installation of each box. b. Equip ceiling and bracket fixture boxes with fixture studs where required. C. Equip outlets in plastered, paneled, and furred finishes with plaster rings and extensions to bring box flush with finish surface. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Contact Information: 1. Cooper B -Line, Highland, IL www.bline.com. 2. Hubbell Incorporated, Milford, CT www.hubbell-wiring.com. 3. Square D, Palatine, IL www.squared.com. 4. Steel City, Div Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com 5. Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com. 6. Walker Systems Inc, Williamstown, www.wiremold.com. 7. Wiremold Co, West Hartford, CT www.wiremold.com. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of materials to be installed and coordinate these with site dimensions and with other Sections. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with Divisions 22 and 23 for installation of raceway for control of plumbing and HVAC equipment. 2. Before rough -in, verify locations of boxes with work of other trades to insure that they are properly located for purpose intended. a. Coordinate location of outlet for water cooler with Division 22. b. Coordinate location of outlets adjacent to or in millwork with Division 06 before rough -in. Refer conflicts to Architect and locate outlet under his direction. 3. Coordinate installation of floor boxes in carpeted areas with carpet installer to obtain carpet for box doors. 4. Install pull wires in raceways installed under this Section where conductors or cables are to be installed under other Divisions. B. Conduit And Raceway: I. Conceal raceways within ceilings, walls, and floors, except at Contractors option, conduit may be exposed on walls or ceilings of mechanical equipment areas and above acoustical panel suspension ceiling systems. Install exposed raceway runs parallel to or at right angles to building structure lines. 2. Keep raceway runs 6 inches minimum from hot water pipes. 3. Make no more than four quarter bends, 360 degrees total, in any conduit run between outlet and outlet, fitting and fitting, or outlet and fitting. a. Make bends and offsets so conduit is not injured and internal diameter of conduit is not effectively reduced. b. Radius of curve shall be at least minimum indicated by NEC. 4. Cut conduit smooth and square with run and ream to remove rough edges. Cap raceway ends during construction. Clean or replace raceway in which water or foreign matter have accumulated. 5. Install insulated bushings on each end of raceway 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger, and on all raceways where low voltage cables emerge. Install expansion fittings where raceways cross building expansion joints. 6. Run two spare conduits from each new panelboard to ceiling access area or other acceptable accessible area and cap for future use. 7. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise. All roof penetrations shall be flashed, counter flashed and sealed per Roofing Contractor. Coordinate all roof penetrations with the Roofing Contractor. 8. Provide nylon pull string with printed footage indicators secured at each end of each empty conduit, except sleeves and nipples. Identify with tags at each end the origin and destination of each empty conduit, and indicate same on all empty or spare conduits on the as -built drawings. RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -2- 260533 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design 9. Install expansion -deflection joints where conduit crosses building expansion, seismic, or structural isolation break (SIB) joints. - 10. Where conduit penetrates fire -rated walls and floors, seal opening around conduit with UL -listed foamed silicone elastomer compound. Fill void around perimeter of conduits with nonmetallic nonshrink grount in all concrete or masonry walls. 11. Bend PVC conduit by hot box bender and, for PVC 2 inches in diameter and larger, expanding plugs. Apply PVC j adhesive only by brush. I 12. Installation In Framing: `I a. Do not bore holes in joists or beams outside center 1/3 of member depth or within 24 inches of bearing points. Do not bore holes in vertical framing members outside center 1/3 of member width. 1111 b. Holes shall be one inch diameter maximum, i. 13. Underground Raceway And Conduit: a. Bury underground raceway installed outside building 24 inches deep minimum. b. Bury underground conduit in planting areas 18 inches deep minimum. It is permissible to install conduit directly below concrete sidewalks, however, conduit must be buried 18 inches deep at point of exit from planting areas. 14, Conduit And Raceway Support: a. Securely support raceway with approved straps, clamps, or hangers, spaced as required. b. Do not support from mechanical ducts or duct supports without Architect's written approval. Securely mount raceway supports, boxes, and cabinets in an approved manner by: I ) Expansion shields in concrete or solid masonry. 2) Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units. 3) Wood screws on wood. 4) Metal screws on metal. 15. Prohibited Procedures: a. Use of wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry units for mounting raceway, supports, boxes, cabinets, or other equipment. b. Installation of raceway that has been crushed or deformed. C. Use of torches for bending PVC. d. Spray applied PVC cement. C. Boring holes in truss members. f Notching of structural members. g. Supporting raceway from ceiling system support wires. h. Nail drive straps or tie wire for supporting raceway. C. Boxes: I. Boxes shall be accessible and installed with approved cover. 2. Do not locate device boxes that are on opposite sides of framed walls in the same stud space. In other wall construction, do not install boxes back to back. 3. Locate boxes so pipes, ducts, or other items do not obstruct outlets. 4. Install outlets flush with finished surface and level and plumb. 5. Support switch boxes larger than two -gang with side brackets and steel bar hangers in framed walls. 6. At time of substantial completion, install blank plates on uncovered outlet boxes that are for future use. 7. Install air / vapor barrier back boxes behind outlet boxes that penetrate vapor barrier. 8. Location: a. install boxes at door locations on latch side of door, unless explicitly shown otherwise on Drawings. Verify door swings shown on electrical drawings with architectural drawings, and report discrepancies to Architect before rough -in. Distance of switch boxes fromjamb shall be within 6 inches of doorjamb. b. Arrange boxes for ceiling light fixtures symmetrically with respect to room dimensions and structural features. C. Properly center boxes located in walls with respect to doors, panels, fuming, trim and consistent with architectural details. Where two or more outlets occur, space them uniformly and in straight lines with each other, if possible. d. Center ceramic tile boxes in tile. END OF SECTION RACEWAY & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -3- 260533 I Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design SECTION 26 5100 - LIGHTING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Fumish and install lighting system as described in Contract Documents, complete with lamps. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Lighting Fixtures: 1. Type One Acceptable Products: a. See Fixture Schedule on Drawings for acceptable manufacturers and models. b. Equals as approved by Architect before bidding. B. Fluorescent Ballasts: 1. Energy saving electronic for T8 lamps. a. Instant start. b. Parallel circuit type. C. Minimum power factor of 95 percent. d. Less than 20% total harmonic distortion. C. Operation of lamps in compliance with Lamp Manufacturer's recommendations. f. Minimum starting temperature 0 deg F for T8 lamps. g. Class A sound rating. h. Transient protection in accordance with IEEE / ANSI C62.41-1984, Category A. I. Comply with FCC 47CFR Part 18. j. Ballast factor of 0.78. k. Maximum crest factor of 1.7. I. Input voltage to match system voltage. C. Lamps: 1. Approved Manufacturers. a. Osram / Sylvania— ONLY, NO SUBSTITUTIONS MANUFACTURERS A. Fixtures: When several lighting fixtures are specified by name for one use on Drawings, select any one of those specified. Do not mix fixtures from different manufacturers specified for one use. B. Specification Items: 1. Advance Transformer Co, Rosemont, IL www.advancetransformer.com. 2. General Electric Lighting, East Cleveland, OH www.gelighting.com/na. 3. Osram Sylvania, Danvers, MA www.sylvania.com. 4. Philips Lighting Co, Somerset, NJ www.lighting.philips.com. 5. Universal Lighting Technologies, Nashville, TN www.universalballast.com. INTERIOR LIGHTING -1- 265100 Project # 3885 6-25-2010 Austin Welding Lab Design - 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL - A. Fixtures shall be fully assembled complete with necessary wiring, sockets, lamps, reflectors, ballasts, auxiliaries, plaster frames, recessing boxes, hangers, supports, lenses, diffusers, and other accessories essential for complete working installation. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work 1. Coordinate with Division under 09 heading to obtain symmetrical arrangement of fixtures in acoustic tile ceiling. 2. Coordinate with Division under 09 to ensure that light coves are properly painted before installation of light fixtures. 3. In mechanical equipment rooms, coordinate locations of light fixtures with equipment locations to provide proper room illumination without obstruction. Suspend fixtures that must be mounted below pipes, ducts, etc, with chains or other Architect approved method. B. Securely mount fixtures. Support fixtures weighing 5016s or more from building framing or structural members. C. Fasten lay -in fluorescent fixtures to ceiling suspension system on each side with bolts, screws, rivets, or clips. In addition, connect lay -in fixtures weighing less than 50 lbs with two -wire hangers minimum to building framing or structural members. Connect wires to opposing comers of fixture and may be slightly slack. Make final conduit connections to lay -in fluorescent fixtures with specified flexible conduit or flexible fixture whips. D. Where fluorescent fixtures are shown installed end to end, provide suitable connectors or collars to connect adjoining units to appear as a continuous unit. E. Where recessed fixtures are to be installed, provide openings, plaster rings, etc, of exact dimensions for such fixtures to be properly installed. Coordinate fixture installation with ceiling type and thickness. Terminate circuits for recessed fixtures in an extension outlet box near fixture and connect with specified flexible conduit. F. Do not locate incandescent fixtures in closet or storage areas within 18 inches and fluorescent fixtures within 6 inches of shelves. 3.2 ADJUSTMENT A. Repair scratches or nicks on exposed surfaces of fixtures to match original undamaged conditions. END OF SECTION INTERIOR LIGHTING -2- 265100